FILE No. A10-1705
AIR TO WATER HEAT PUMP
Service Manual
Model name:
Hydro unit
Outdoor unit
HWS-P805XWHM3-E(TR) HWS-P805HR-E(TR)
HWS-P805XWHT6-E(TR) HWS-P1105HR-E(TR)
HWS-P805XWHT9-E
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E(TR)
HWS-P1105XWHT6-E(TR)
HWS-P1105XWHT9-E(TR)
Contents
1 Safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Refrigerant (R410A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2-1.Safety during installation and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2-2.Installing refrigerant pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2-2-1.Steel pipe and joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2-2-2.Processing of piping materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2-3.Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-3-1.Necessary tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-4.Recharging of refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2-5.Brazing of pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-5-1.Materials of brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-5-2.Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-5-3.Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4 Outside drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4-1.Hydro unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4-2.Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4-3.Hot water cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5 Wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5-1.Hydro unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5-2.Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5-3.Hot water cylinder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6 Key electric component rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6-1.Hydro unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6-2.Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6-3.Hot water cylinder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6-4.Water heat exchange control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6-5.Outdoor control board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7 Refrigeration cycle / Water system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7-1.Water system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7-2.Refrigeration cycle system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
8 Operational description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1
9 Method of defect diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9-1.Matters to be confirmed first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
9-1-1.Check the power supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
9-1-2.Check for any miswiring of the connection cables between the hydro unit and the outdoor unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
9-1-3.About the installation of the temperature sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
9-2.Non-defective operation (program operation) … No fault code display appears.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
9-3.Outline of the determination diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9-3-1.Procedure of defect diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9-3-2.How to determine from the check code on the remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9-3-3.How to cancel a check code on the remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9-3-4.How to diagnose by error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9-4.Diagnosis flow chart for each error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9-4-1.Hydro unit failure detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9-4-2.Outdoor unit failure detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9-4-3.Temperature sensor, temperature-resistance characteristic table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9-5.Operation check by PC board switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9-5-1.Operation check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9-6.Brief method for checking the key components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9-6-1.Hydro unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9-6-2.Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10 Hydro unit and outdoor unit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
11 Replacement of the service PC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12 How to exchange main parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13 For cooling installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14 Periodic inspection items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
15 Part exploded view, part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2
1
Safety precautions
The unit and this service guide list very important safety precautions.
Understand the following details (indications and symbols) before reading the body text, and follow the instructions.
[About indication]
Indication
Meaning of Indication
DANGER
Indicates that a wrong operation may cause a service engineer and the third persons
around to get fatal or serious injuries.
WARNING
Indicates that a wrong operation may cause a service engineer and the third persons
around to get fatal or serious injuries, or that unit defective after the operation may cause
a user to have a similar serious accident.
CAUTION
Indicates that a wrong operation may cause a service engineer and the third persons
around to get injuries or may cause property damage*, or that unit defective after the
operation may cause a user to have a similar accident.
* Property damage indicates extended damage to property, furniture, livestock, or pets.
[About symbols]
Symbols
Meaning of Symbols
Indicates a forbidden action.
Specific forbidden actions are described in text near the symbol.
Indicates a forcible (must do) action.
Specific forcible actions are described in text near the symbol.
Indicates a caution (including danger and warning).
Specific cautions are described in picture or text inside or near the symbol.
DANGER
<Turn off the power breaker>
Turn off the power breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet.
• Failure to do so may cause a high voltage electric shock, leading to death or injury.
• During an operation, the second side circuit of high pressure transmission(*) are applied with a high voltage of 230 V
or higher.
• Touching the circuit even with an electrical insulator, let alone a bare hand or body, causes an electric shock.
∗: For details, see the schematic.
<Discharge between terminals>
When the front panel and cabinet are removed, make short-circuit current to discharge between high pressure
capacitor terminals.
• Failure to do so may cause a high voltage electric shock, leading to death or injury.
• After the power is turned off, the high pressure capacitor is still charged with high voltage.
<Forbidden>
Do not turn on the power breaker after removing the front panel cabinet.
• Failure to do so may cause a high voltage electric shock, leading to death or injury.
WARNING
<Check earth ground>
Before starting failure diagnosis or repair, check that the earth wire (∗) is connected to the unit ground terminal.
• An unconnected earth wire could cause an electric shock if electric leakage occurs.
• If the earth ground is not properly connected, ask an electrical worker for rework of the ground connection.
∗: Earth wire of class D grounding
3
WARNING
<No modification>
Do not modify the unit.
• Do not disassemble or modify the parts also.
• A fire, an electric shock, or an injury may occur.
<Use specified parts>
Use the specified parts (∗) when replacing them.
• Using parts other than specified ones may cause a fire or an electric shock.
∗: For details, see the parts price list.
<Keep children away from unit>
Keep any person (including children) other than service engineers away from a failure diagnosis or repairing place.
• A tool or disassembled parts may cause an injury.
• Advise the customer to keep the third persons (including children) away from the unit.
<Insulation treatment>
After connecting a cut lead with a crimp contact, discharge by facing the closed side upward.
• Connect lead wires with crimping terminals and turn the closed end upwards to avoid exposure to water.
<Watch out for fire>
Observe the following instructions when repairing the refrigerant cycle.
(1) Watch out for surrounding fire. Always put out the fire of stove burner or other devices before starting the repair.
Should the fire fail to be put out, the oil mixed with refrigerant gas could catch fire.
(2) Do no use a welder in a closed room.
A room with no ventilation may cause carbon monoxide poisoning.
(3) Keep away flammable materials.
The materials may catch the fire of a welder.
<Use refrigerant carefully>
Check the refrigerant name to use the tools and members appropriate for the refrigerant.
• A product using the refrigerant R410A has the refrigerant name prominently displayed on its outdoor unit. In
addition, the diameter of the service port is changed from that of the conventional R22 to prevent incorrect filling.
Never use refrigerant other than R410A for Air to Water Heat Pump using R410A. Also, never use R410A for Air to
Water Heat Pump using other refrigerant (such as R22).
• A mixture of R410A with different ones excessively raises the pressure in the refrigerant cycle, leading to an injury
due to burst.
Do not make additional charge of the refrigerant.
• An additional charge when refrigerant gas leaks changes the refrigerant composition in the refrigerant cycle,
causing the characteristics change of the Air to Water Heat Pump or excessive high pressure in the refrigerant
cycle with more than the specified amount of refrigerant charged. This may cause burst or an injury. If the
refrigerant gas leaks, perform refrigerant recovery or other operation to make the Air to Water Heat Pump contain
no refrigerant, and then perform vacuuming. After that, refill the unit with the defined amount of liquid refrigerant.
Never charge refrigerant exceeding the amount specified.
When the refrigerant cycle is refilled with refrigerant, do not enter air or refrigerants other than the specified
refrigerant, R410A.
• A mixture of R410A with air or an inappropriate substance causes excessive high pressure inside the refrigerant
cycle, leading to an injury due to burst.
Check that there is no refrigerant gas leak after the installation is completed.
• If it catches fire of a fan heater, a space heater, or a stove, poisonous gases may be produced.
<Be careful with wiring>
After a repair is completed, be sure to reassemble the parts and put the wiring back to its original state. In addition,
be careful with the internal wiring not to be caught in a cabinet or panel.
• A defective assembly or wiring may cause a disaster at a customer site due to electrical leakage or a fire.
<Check for water leak>
After the repair of a water pathway is completed, check that there is no water leak.
• In using the product, water leak may cause a fire at a customer site due to electrical leakage or an electric shock.
4
WARNING
<Check insulation>
After the work is completed, check with an insulating-resistance tester (500V) that the insulation resistance between
the live and dead-metal parts is 2 MΩ or higher.
• A low insulation resistance may cause a disaster at a customer site due to electrical leakage or an electric shock.
<Ventilate>
Ventilate if refrigerant gas leaks during service work.
• Should refrigerant gas catch fire, poisonous gases may be produced. A closed room full of leaking refrigerant
results in the absence of oxygen; it is dangerous. Make sure to ventilate.
<Caution: electric shock>
When checking a circuit while energized if necessary, use rubber gloves not to contact the live part.
• Contact with the live part may cause an electric shock.
• The unit contains high-voltage circuits. Contact with a part in the control board with your bare hand may cause an
electric shock. Take enough care to check circuits.
<Turn off the power breaker>
Because the electrical components are energized with high voltage, always turn off the power breaker before
starting to work.
• Failure to do so may cause an electric shock.
<Always do>
Should refrigerant gas leak, find where the gas leaks and properly repair it.
• To stop the repair work because the leakage location cannot be identified, perform refrigerant recovery and close
the service valve. Failure to do so may cause the refrigerant gas to leak in a room. Although refrigerant gas alone
is harmless, if it catches fire of a fan heater, a space heater, or a stove, poisonous gases may be produced.
When installing the unit or re-installing it after relocation, follow the installation guide for proper operation.
• A defective installation may cause a refrigerant cycle defective, a water leak, an electric shock, or a fire.
<Check after repair>
After a repair is completed, check for any abnormality.
• Failure to do so may cause a fire, an electric shock, or an injury.
• Turn off the power breaker to perform check.
After a repair is completed (and the front panel and cabinet are placed), make a test run to check for any abnormality
such as smoke or abnormal sound.
• Failure to do so may cause a fire or an electric shock. Place the front panel and cabinet before making a test run.
<Check after re-installation>
Check that the following are properly performed after re-installation.
(1) The earth wire is properly connected.
(2) The installation is stable without any tilt or wobbles.
Failure to check them may cause a fire, an electric shock, or an injury.
CAUTION
<Wear gloves>
Wear gloves (∗) when performing repair.
• Failure to do so may cause an injury when accidentally contacting the parts.
∗: Thick gloves such as cotton work gloves
<Cooling check>
Perform service work when the unit becomes cool enough after the operation.
• High temperature of compressor piping or other equipment after a cooling or heating operation may cause burn.
<Tighten with torque wrench>
Tighten a flare nut with a torque wrench in the specified method.
• A flare nut tightened too much might crack after a long period, causing refrigerant leak.
5
2
Refrigerant (R410A)
This Air to Water Heat Pump adopts a refrigerant HFC (R410A) to prevent destruction of the ozone layer.
The working pressure of R410A refrigerant is 1.6 times higher than that of the conventional refrigerant R22.The
refrigerant oil is also changed for the new refrigeration. Therefore, during installation or service work, be sure that
water, dust, former refrigerant, or refrigeration machine oil does not enter the refrigerant cycle of the new type
refrigerant Air to Water Heat Pump. A wrong installation or service operation may cause a serious accident.
Read carefully the following instructions to use the tools or members for R410A for safety work.
2-1. Safety during installation and service
• Use only the refrigerant R410A for Air to Water Heat Pump using R410A.
A mixture of R410A with different ones excessively raises the pressure in a refrigerant cycle, leading to an injury
due to burst.
• Check the refrigerant name to use the tools and members appropriate for the refrigerant.
A product using the refrigerant R410A has the refrigerant name prominently displayed on its outdoor unit. In
addition, the diameter of the service port is changed from that of the conventional R22 to prevent incorrect filling.
• Ventilate if refrigerant gas leaks during service work.
Should refrigerant gas catch fire, poisonous gases may be produced. A closed room full of leaking refrigerant
results in the absence of oxygen; it is dangerous. Make sure to ventilate.
• When the refrigerant cycle is refilled with refrigerant, do not mix air or refrigerants other than the specified
refrigerant, R410A.
A mixture of R410A with air or an inappropriate substance causes excessive high pressure inside the refrigerant
cycle, leading to an injury due to burst.
• Check that no refrigerant gas leaks after the installation is completed.
Should a refrigerant gas leak in a room and catch fire, poisonous gases may be produced.
• When installing the unit that contains large amount of refrigerant such as Air to Water Heat Pump, take measures
to prevent the refrigerant from exceeding the threshold concentration in case it leaks.
Should leaking refrigerant exceed the threshold concentration could cause an accident due to oxygen deficient.
• When installing the unit or re-installing it after relocation, follow the installation guide for proper operation.
A defective installation may cause a refrigerant cycle defective, a water leak, an electric shock, or a fire.
• Do not modify the product. Do not disassemble or modify the parts also.
A fire, an electric shock, or an injury may occur.
6
2-2. Installing refrigerant pipe
2-2-1. Steel pipe and joint
For refrigerant piping, steel pipe and joints are mainly used. Select those comply with JIS (Japanese Industrial
Standards) for a service work. Also, use such clean piping materials that less impurities attach to the inside of pipe
and joints.
Copper pipe
Use copper pipe of the “copper and copper alloy seamless pipe” type with attach oil quantity of 40 mg / 10 m or less.
Do not use pipe that is cracked, distorted, or discoloured (especially inside).The expansion valve or capillary may
get clogged with impurities.
Considering that Air to Water Heat Pump using R410A is higher in pressure than those using the conventional R22,
be sure to select the material that comply with the standard.
Table 2-1 shows the thickness of copper pipe used for R410A.
Never use commercially available thin-walled copper pipe of 0.8 mm thick or less.
Table 2-1 Wall thickness of copper pipe
Wall thickness (mm)
Nominal diameter
Outer diameter
R410A
3/8
9.52
0.80
5/8
15.88
1.00
Joints
For the joint of copper pipe, flared joint and socket joint are used. Remove impurities from a joint before using it.
• Flared joint
A flared joint cannot be used for the copper pipe whose outer diameter is 20 mm or larger. A socket joint can be
used instead in that case.
Table 2-2-3 and 2-2-4 show the dimensions of flare pipe, the end of flared joint, and flare nuts.
• Socket joint
A socket joint is used to connect the thick-walled pipe of mainly 20 mm or larger in diameter.
Table 2-2 shows the wall thickness of socket joints.
Table 2-2 The minimum wall thickness of socket joints
Nominal diameter
Reference of outer diameter of
copper pipe connected (mm)
Minimum joint wall thickness
(mm)
3/8
9.52
0.80
5/8
15.9
1.00
7
2-2-2. Processing of piping materials
When installing refrigerant pipe, prevent water or dust from entering the pipe, and do not use oil other than lubricant
used for Air to Water Heat Pump. Make sure that no refrigerant leak occurs.
If piping needs lubrication, use lubricating oil whose water content is removed.
After the oil is put in, be sure to seal the container with air proof cover or other covers.
Flare and precautions
1) Cut a pipe.
Cut slowly with a pipe cutter so that the pipe is not distorted.
2) Remove burr and flaw.
A burr or flaw in a flare part may cause refrigerant leak. Remove carefully all the burrs, and clean up the
cut ends before installation.
3) Insert a flare nut.
4) Flare
Figure 2-2-1
Check that the clasps and copper pipe are clean. Flare
Flare dimension
correctly using the clasp. Use a flare tool for R410A or the
D
conventional one. Flare processing dimension varies
A
depending on the flare tool type. When using the
conventional flare tool, use a gauge for size adjustment
to secure the A dimension.
Table 2-2-3 Flare processing related dimension for R410A
A (mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
(mm)
Wall thickness
(mm)
3/8
9.52
5/8
15.9
Conventional flare tool
Flare tool for R410A
clutch type
Clutch type
Butterfly-nut type
0.8
0 to 0.5
1.0 to 1.5
2.0 to 2.5
1.0
0 to 0.5
1.0 to 1.5
2.0 to 2.5
Table 2-2-4 Dimension of flare for R410A and flare nut
Dimension (mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
(mm)
Wall thickness
(mm)
A
B
3/8
9.52
0.8
13.0
13.2
5/8
15.9
1.0
19.1
19.7
D
Flare nut width
(mm)
9.7
20
18
15.9
24.5
26
C
Figure 2-2-2 Relationship between flare nut and flare surface
45°
6°
-4
B A
C
43°
8
- 45
°
D
Flare connecting procedure and precautions
1) Make sure that the flare and connecting portions do not have any flaw and dust.
2) Correctly align the flared surface and the connecting axis.
3) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench. The tightening torque for R410A is
the same as that for the conventional R22. If the torque is weak, gas leakage may occur. If it is too strong,
the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable. When choosing the tightening toque, comply
with values designated by products. Table 2-2-5 shows reference values.
NOTE
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the product. Using any other oil deteriorates
the lubricating oil, possibly causing the compressor to burn out.
Table 2-2-5 Tightening torque of flare for R410A (Reference values)
Nominal diameter
Outer diameter (mm)
Tightening torque N•m (kgf•m)
3/8
9.52
33 to 42 (3.3 to 14.2)
5/8
15.9
66 to 82 (6.8 to 8.2)
9
2-3. Tools
2-3-1. Necessary tools
In Air to Water Heat Pump using R410A, the service port diameter of packed valve of the outdoor unit is changed
to prevent mixing of other refrigerant. To reinforce the pressure resistance, flare dimensions and opposite side
dimensions of flare nut (For Ø 12.7 copper pipe) of the refrigerant piping are lengthened.
Because the refrigerating machine oil is changed, mixing of oil may generate sludge, clog capillary, or cause other
problems. Accordingly, the tools to be used include:
• tools dedicated for R410A (Those that cannot be used for the conventional refrigerant, R22)
• tools dedicated for R410A, but can be also used for the conventional refrigerant, R22
• tools that can be used for the conventional refrigerant, R22.
The following table shows the tools dedicated for R410A and their interchangeability.
Tools dedicated for R410A (The following tools must be for R410A)
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability
R410A Air to Water Hear Pump
installation
No.
Tool to be used
Usage
Conventional refrigerant
Air to Water Heat Pump
installation
For R410A
Existence of new
equipment
Conventional
equipment can be
used
New equipment can be
used with conventional
refrigerant
1
Flare tool
Pipe flaring
Yes
*(Note 1)
Yes
2
Copper pipe gauge for
adjusting projection margin
Flaring by conventional
flare tool
Yes
*(Note 1)
*(Note 1)
3
Torque wrench (For Ø15.9)
Connection of flare nut
Yes
No
No
4
Gauge manifold
5
Charge hose
Evacuating, refrigerant
charge, run check, etc.
Yes
No
No
6
Vacuum pump adapter
Vacuum evacuating
Yes
No
Yes
7
Electrical balance for
refrigerant charging
Refrigerant charge
Yes
No
Yes
8
Refrigerant cylinder
Refrigerant charge
Yes
No
No
9
Leakage detector
Gas leakage check
Yes
No
Yes
10
Charging cylinder
Refrigerant charge
*(Note 2)
No
No
* (Note 1) Flaring for R410A by using the conventional flare tool requires projection margin adjustment. This
adjustment requires copper pipe gauge or other instrument.
* (Note 2) A charging cylinder for R410A is currently under development.
General tools (Conventional tools are available)
In addition to the above dedicated tools, the following equipment also available for R22 is necessary as the general
tools.
1. Vacuum pump
Use this by attaching vacuum pump
adapter.
2. Torque wrench (For Ø6.35)
3. Pipe cutter
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Reamer
Pipe bender
Level vial
Screwdriver (+, –)
Spanner or Monkey wrench
Also prepare the following equipment for other work methods or run check.
1. Clamp meter
2. Thermometer
3. Insulation resistance meter
4. Electroscope
10
9. Hole core drill (Ø65)
10. Hexagon wrench
(Opposite side 4 mm)
11. Tape measure
12. Metal saw
2-4. Recharging of refrigerant
Recharge, if necessary, the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the following procedure.
Recover the refrigerant, and check that no
refrigerant remains in the refrigerant cycle.
Open fully the handle of gauge manifold Lo, turn on the
vacuum pump, and then perform vacuum evacuating.
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service
port on the outdoor unit's gas side.
When the compound gauge's pointer indicates
-0.1 MPa (-76 cmHg), close fully the handle Lo and turn
off the vacuum pump.
Connect the charge hose to the vacuum pump
adapter.
Let the equipment stay as it is for one to two minutes
and check that the compound gauge pointer does not
return.
Open fully both packed valves on the liquid and
gas sides.
Place the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the
connecting port of the electronic balance, and then
charge liquid refrigerant.
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below)
NOTE
• Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.
• If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge it a little at a time while running refrigerant
recovery (pump down).
• Do not make additional charging.
An additional charge when refrigerant leaks changes the refrigerant composition in the refrigerant cycle,
causing the characteristics change of the Air to Water Heat Pump or excessive high pressure in the refrigerant
cycle with more than the specified amount of refrigerant charged. This may cause burst or an injury.
Fig. 2-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging
(Hydro unit)
(Outdoor unit)
Open
Refrigerant cylinder (with siphon)
Check valve
Open
Open Close
Open/close valve
for charging
Service port
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging
11
NOTE
• Make sure that the setting is appropriate so that liquid can be charged.
• A cylinder with siphon enables liquid to be charged without the cylinder turned upside down.
[Cylinder with siphon]
Gauge manifold
Refrigerant
cylinder
Electronic balance
Outdoor unit
[Cylinder without siphon]
Gauge manifold
Outdoor unit
Siphon pipe
Refrigerant
cylinder
Electronic balance
NOTE
• Because R410A is HFC mixed refrigerant, charging with gas changes the charged refrigerant composition,
causing the equipment characteristics to change.
12
2-5. Brazing of pipes
Type of flux
• Non-corrosive flux
It is generally a compound of borax and boric acid.
It is effective when brazing temperature is higher
than 800 °C.
• Active solvent
Most of this type of flux is generally used for silver
brazing.
It features the increase of oxide film while moving the
capability to the borax-boric acid compound to add
compounds such as potassium fluoride, potassium
chloride, or sodium fluoride.
2-5-1. Materials of brazing
Silver brazing metal
Silver brazing metal is an alloy mainly composed of
silver and copper.
It uses iron, copper, or copper alloy, and is relatively
expensive though it excels in soldering.
Phosphor bronze brazing metal
Phosphor bronze brazing metal is generally used to
join copper or copper alloy.
Piping materials for brazing and brazing
metal / flux
Low temperature brazing metal
Low temperature brazing metal is generally called
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead. Do not use it for
refrigerant piping because its adhesive capacity is low.
Piping material
NOTE
• Phosphor bronze brazing metal tends to react with
sulfur, producing a fragile compound water solution.
This may cause gas leakage. Therefore, use other
type of brazing metal at a hot spring resort or similar
place, and coat the surface with coatings.
• To braze the pipe again while performing service
work, use the same type of brazing metal.
Brazing metal to be
Flux to be used
used
Copper - Copper
Phosphor copper
Do not use
Copper - Iron
Silver
Paste flux
Iron - Iron
Silver
Vapour flux
NOTE
• Do not enter flux into the refrigerant cycle.
• If chlorine contained in the flux remains within the
pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates. Because of
this, use a flux that does not contain chlorine.
• When adding water to the flux, use water that does
not contains chlorine. (e.g. distilled water or ionexchange water)
• Remove the flux after brazing.
2-5-2. Flux
Why flux is necessary
2-5-3. Brazing
• Removing all the oxide film and any foreign matter
on the metal surface assists the flow of brazing
metal.
• Flux prevents the metal surface from being oxidized
in the course of brazing.
• Reducing the brazing metal's surface tension
enables the brazing metal to adhere for better metal
processing.
Brazing must be performed by a person qualified and
experienced with theoretical knowledge since the
operation requires sophisticated techniques.
Perform brazing while flowing dry nitrogen gas (N2) to
prevent oxide film from forming during brazing
application to the inside of the pipe.
NOTE
Characteristics of flux
• Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.
• The activation temperature of flux matches the
brazing temperature.
• A wide effective temperature range makes flux hard
to carbonize.
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and brazing
metal is minimum.
• The good performance of flux gives no harm to a
human body.
Since flux works in a complicated manner as
described above, select an appropriate type of flux
according to metal treatment type, brazing metal and
brazing method, or other conditions.
Brazing method to prevent oxidation
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow meter to the
nitrogen cylinder.
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping material,
and attach the flow meter to the balance.
3) Apply a mark to the clearance between the
piping material and the copper pipe filled with
nitrogen to prevent the back flow of the
nitrogen gas.
4) If the nitrogen gas flows out, be sure to keep
open the piping end.
13
5) Use the reducing valve to adjust the nitrogen
gas flow speed to 0.05 m3/hour or 0.02 MPa
(0.2 kgf/cm2).
6) After the steps above, keep the nitrogen gas
flowing until the pipe cools down to a certain
extent. (Temperature where the pipe is cool
enough to be touched by hands)
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.
Fig 2-5-1
Prevention of oxidation during brazing
M Flow meter
Stop valve
Nitrogen gas cylinder
From nitrogen cylinder
Nitrogen gas
Pipe
Robber plug
14
3
Specifications
Unit name
Hydro unit
HWS-P805XWHM3-E, P805XWHT6-E, P805XWHT9-E
Outdoor unit
HWS-P805HR-E
Heating capacity *1 (kW)
8.0
Cooling capacity *2 (kW)
6.0
Variable range of compressor frequency
10 - 70 Hz
Power source
Single phase 50 Hz 220-230 V
Operation mode
Electric characteristic *1 *2
Heating
Hydro unit
Outdoor unit
0.44
0.44
Power (kW)
0.06
0.06
Power factor (%)
59.3
59.3
Current (A)
7.57
7.39
Power (kW)
1.62
1.58
Power factor (%)
Total
Operating noise sound power level
Running current (A)
93
93
8.01
7.83
Hydro unit (dB (A))
41
Outdoor unit (dB (A))
66
Coefficient of performance *1 *2
Hydro unit
4.76
Outer dimension
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
525
Depth (mm)
355
49
Color
Silky shade (Munsell 1Y8.5/0.5)
Remote controller
Outer dimension *3
Height (mm)
120
Width (mm)
120
Circulation pump
Motor output (W)
Depth (mm)
16
125 (MAX)
Flow rate (L/min)
22.9
Type
Outer dimension
Plate-type heat exchange
Height (mm)
1340
Width (mm)
900
Depth (mm)
320
Net weight (kg)
92
Color
Compressor
Fan motor
Silky shade (Munsell 1Y8.5/0.5)
Motor output (W)
2500
Type
Twin rotary type with DC-inverter variable speed control
Model
DA422A3F-26M
Standard air capacity (m3/min)
Motor output (W)
Outdoor unit
Flare connection
Liquid
Ø9.52
Gas
Ø15.9
Liquid
Ø9.52
Gas
Ø15.9
Maximum length (m)
30
Maximum chargeless length (m)
30
Maximum height difference (m)
±30
Minimum length (m)
Refrigerant
Refrigerant name
Water piping
Pipe diameter
5
R410A
Charge amount (kg)
2.7
R1 1/4
Maximum length (m)
Operating temperature range
Operating humidity range
Wiring connection
103.0
100 × 2
Connection method
Hydro unit
17.2
Non-self-suction centrifugal pump
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant piping
3.66
925
Net weight (kg)
Outdoor unit
Cooling
Current (A)
None (Need the flow rate 13 /min or more)
Maximum height difference (m)
±7
Maximum working water pressure (kPa) *4
430
Hydro unit (°C) *5 (Cooling / Heating / Hot water)
5-32 / 5-32 / 5-32
Outdoor unit (°C) (Cooling / Heating / Hot water)
10-43 / -25-25 / -25-43
Hydro unit (%)
15-85
Outdoor unit (%)
15-100
Power wiring
3 wires: including earth wire (Outdoor unit)
Connecting line
4 wires: including earth wire
*1 Heating performance measurement conditions: outside air temperature 7 °C, water supply temperature 30 °C, outlet temperature 35 °C, refrigerant piping length 7.5 m (no height
difference).
*2 Cooling performance measurement conditions: outside air temperature 35 °C, water supply temperature 12 °C, outlet temperature 7 °C, refrigerant piping length 7.5 m (no height
difference).
*3 • The remote controller should be shipped with the hydro unit.
• Use two 1.5-meter wires to connect the hydro unit with the remote controller.
*4 Check the water piping for leakage under the maximum operating pressure.
*5 Do not leave the hydro unit at 5 °C or below.
15
Unit name
Hydro unit
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, P1105XWHT6-E, P1105XWHT9-E
Outdoor unit
HWS-P1105HR-E
Heating capacity *1 (kW)
11.2
Cooling capacity *2 (kW)
10.0
Variable range of compressor frequency
10 - 90 Hz
Power source
Single phase 50 Hz 220-230 V
Operation mode
Electric characteristic *1 *2
Heating
Hydro unit
Outdoor unit
0.66
0.66
Power (kW)
0.09
0.09
Power factor (%)
59.2
59.2
Current (A)
10.33
14.99
Power (kW)
2.21
3.24
Power factor (%)
Total
Operating noise sound power level
Running current (A)
93
94
10.99
15.65
Hydro unit (dB (A))
43
Outdoor unit (dB (A))
66
Coefficient of performance *1 *2
Hydro unit
4.88
Outer dimension
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
525
Depth (mm)
355
52
Color
Silky shade (Munsell 1Y8.5/0.5)
Remote controller
Outer dimension *3
Height (mm)
120
Width (mm)
120
Circulation pump
Motor output (W)
Depth (mm)
16
190 (MAX)
Flow rate (L/min)
32.1
Type
Outer dimension
Plate-type heat exchange
Height (mm)
1340
Width (mm)
900
Depth (mm)
320
Net weight (kg)
92
Color
Compressor
Fan motor
Silky shade (Munsell 1Y8.5/0.5)
Motor output (W)
2500
Type
Twin rotary type with DC-inverter variable speed control
Model
DA422A3F-26M
Standard air capacity (m3/min)
Motor output (W)
Outdoor unit
Flare connection
Liquid
Ø9.52
Gas
Ø15.9
Liquid
Ø9.52
Gas
Ø15.9
Maximum length (m)
30
Maximum chargeless length (m)
30
Maximum height difference (m)
±30
Minimum length (m)
Refrigerant
Refrigerant name
Water piping
Pipe diameter
5
R410A
Charge amount (kg)
2.7
R1 1/4
Maximum length (m)
Operating temperature range
Operating humidity range
Wiring connection
103.0
100 × 2
Connection method
Hydro unit
28.9
Non-self-suction centrifugal pump
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant piping
3.00
925
Net weight (kg)
Outdoor unit
Cooling
Current (A)
None (Need the flow rate 18 /min or more)
Maximum height difference (m)
±7
Maximum working water pressure (kPa) *4
430
Hydro unit (°C) *5 (Cooling / Heating / Hot water)
5-32 / 5-32 / 5-32
Outdoor unit (°C) (Cooling / Heating / Hot water)
10-43 / -25-25 / -25-43
Hydro unit (%)
15-85
Outdoor unit (%)
15-100
Power wiring
3 wires: including earth wire (Outdoor unit)
Connecting line
4 wires: including earth wire
*1 Heating performance measurement conditions: outside air temperature 7 °C, water supply temperature 30 °C, outlet temperature 35 °C, refrigerant piping length 7.5 m (no height
difference).
*2 Cooling performance measurement conditions: outside air temperature 35 °C, water supply temperature 12 °C, outlet temperature 7 °C, refrigerant piping length 7.5 m (no height
difference).
*3 • The remote controller should be shipped with the hydro unit.
• Use two 1.5-meter wires to connect the hydro unit with the remote controller.
*4 Check the water piping for leakage under the maximum operating pressure.
*5 Do not leave the hydro unit at 5 °C or below.
16
4
Outside drawing
4-1. Hydro unit
HWS-P805XWHM3-E, P805XWHT6-E, P805XWHT9-E
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, P1105XWHT6-E, P1105XWHT9-E
B leg part
355
9
2-dia.12x17 long hole
(for dia.8-10 anchor bolt)
371.5
380
40 Anchor bolt
long hole pitch
72.5
72.5
960
Anchor bolt long hole pitch
920
20
40
352
19.5
525
Manometer
20
2-dia.12x17 U-shape hole
(for dia.8-10 anchor bolt)
116
Hot water outlet
connecting pipe 1 1/4"
186.5
19.5
135.5
40
37.5
158
A leg part
259
40
54
Remote controller
Drain nipple
Gas line dia.15.88
Water inlet
connecting pipe 1 1/4"
Liquid line dia.9.52
144.5
309.5
17
59.5
7
Z arrow view
83
52
75
46
60 178
68
327
178
900
178
518
550
Air
383 discharge 70 Portion A
150
600
Knockout for lower part of piping
360
34
170
17.5
17.5
365
74 118 128
534
581
Z
80
135
Details of portion A
1
2
18
18
1
2
43.5
Refrigerant gas
connection ( 15.9 flare)
Refrigerant liquid
connection ( 9.5 flare)
39
96
80
151
Mounting bolt hole
( 12 17 long hole)
40
613
Air intake
605
55 95
155
655
121
74
534
581
85
70
48
54
Drain hole ( 25 burring hole)
Portion B
55 95
200 60
Air intake
94
5-Drain hole
( 20 88 burring hole)
7
65
12
400
320
38 knockout hole
Description
1
12
64
Mounting bolt hole
( 12 17 U-shape hole)
2 Power source intake hole
Details of portion B
40
Name
Refrigerant piping outlet
1 Hydro and outdoor
connecting line outlet
1340
24
18
55 95
380
4-2. Outdoor unit
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
4-3. Hot water cylinder
HWS-2101CSHM3-E(-UK)
HWS-3001CSHM3-E(-UK)
550
595
595
550
2040
2066.6
Specification
for UK only
HWS-1501CSHM3-E(-UK)
Specification
for UK only
1090
1114
595
550
19
1474
1497.6
Specification
for UK only
5
Wiring diagram
5-1. Hydro unit
*Option
Remote
controller
(HWS-AMS54E)
RY
10
RY
11
6 6
5
4
3
2 2
1 1
1 1
CN601
(RED)
7 7
5 5
BLK
WHI
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
ON
1 2 3 4
SW13
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
RY605
CN201
(WHI)
3
3
1
1
WHI
YEL
BLK
ORN
41 42 43 44 TB 04
5
5
1
1
3
3
PNK
2
4
6
GRN
1
1 1
GRN
2
2 2
GRN
3
3 3
GRN
4
4 4
PJ20
1
2
3
4
YEL
1
YEL
2
YEL
3
YEL
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PJ17
1
2
3
4
YEL
1
YEL
2
YEL
3
YEL
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PJ17
CN202
(YEL)
BLK
1 1
2
BLK
3 3
CN102
(WHI)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
3
3
8
RY
03
7
A2
RY
02
4
A1
CN101
(WHI)
6
3
3
1
5
3
3
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
WHI
Compressor operation
O/P
4
3
2
1
K2
Defrost O/P
TB1
Photocoupler input
p.c.board
(MCC-1214)
3
2
1
Hot water tank thermostat I/P
Emergency stop I/P
3
2
1
Cooling thermostat I/P
Heating thermostat I/P
TB1
Photocoupler input
p.c.board
(MCC-1214)
TB1
2 2
1 1
Flow switch
Thermal protector
(auto) 75 5
BRW
BRW
RED
RED
ORN
ORN
3 3
WHI
WHI
1. The one-dot chain line indicates
wiring at the local site, and the
dashed line indicates accessories
sold separately and service wires,
respectively.
, and
indicates the terminal
2.
board and the numbers indicate the
terminal numbers.
indicates P.C. board.
3.
* Be sure to fix the electric
parts cover surely with screws.
(Otherwise water enters into the box
resulting in malfunction.)
P100 BLK
A1
RY
04
4
TB1
K1
Relay
p.c.board
(MCC-1217)
7 RY
01 8
Boiler control O/P
Alarm O/P
Transformer
1 1
F100
Fuse
T5A
250V~
CN305 CN100
(GRN) (WHI)
K2
PJ20
A2
WHI
*1
WHI
GRY
ORN
RY
01
RED
MIXV
7
RY
06
8
RY607
CN606
(BLU)
6
5
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
K1
Relay
p.c.board
(MCC-1217)
1
2
1 2 3 4
SW07
RY606
CN605
(YEL)
7
7
GRN
1
1 1
GRN
2
2 2
GRN
3
3 3
GRN
4
4 4
YEL
1 1
GRN
2 2
RED
3 3
CN200
(RED)
RY603
RY604
CN604
(BLU)
Type 2
(3-wire SPST type)
1 2 3 4
SW12
SW06
RED
WHI
ORN
PNK
RED
PNK
RED
YEL
CN602
(WHI)
Type 3
(3-wire SPDT type)
SW 11
1 2
1 1
MIXV
Type 1
(3-wire SPDT type)
WHI
WHI
YEL
WHI
RED
RED
SW10
WHI
3 3
*See DIP SW13_1
Thermal protector
(Single operation)
95 5
Thermal protector
(Single operation)
95 5
1L1 3L2 5L3 RY02 1L1 3L2 5L3
Symbol
Parts name
Water pump motor
3-way valve (local)
2-way valve (local)
Mixing valve (local)
Booster heater
Relay01~Relay06
Low pressure sensor
Heater AC230V, 3kW
RY02
HWS-P805XWHT9-E
HWS-P1105XWHT9-E
HWS-P1105XWHT9TR
Parts name
Water heat exchanger temperature sensor
Water heat exchanger inlet temperature sensor
Water heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor
Backup heater outlet temperature sensor
Hot water cylinder temperature sensor
Floor heating inlet temperature sensor
Terminal block
BLU
2T1 4T2 6T3
BLU
BLU
BLK
F3 F4 F5 F6
F3~8
Fuse
AC250V
T30A
BLK
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLU
GRY
BLK
Symbol
TC
TWI
TWO
THO
TTW
TFI
TB
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
BLU
BRW
BLU
Power supply
380 - 400V 3N~ 50Hz
1L1 3L2 5L3
1L1 3L2 5L3
RY04
2T1 4T2 6T3
L1 L2 L3 N TB 02
Power supply
220 - 230V~ 50Hz
Hot water cylinder
WPM
3WV
2WV
MIXV
BH
RY01~RY06
LPS
Backup heater1, 2, 3
GRY
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
BLU
*Option
2T1 4T2 6T3
BRW
BLU
BLU
BLU
BRW
BRW
L N
YEL/GRN
BRW
F1, F2
Fuse
AC250V
T30A
F1 F2
1 2
RY02
1L1 3L2 5L3
RY04
2T1 4T2
TB 03 31 32
Backup heater 3
Thermal protector
(Single operation)95 5
Backup heater 1
F3 F4
F3~6
Fuse
AC250V
T30A
L1 L2 L3 N TB 02
Power supply
380 - 400V 3N~ 50Hz
BLU
RY05
Thermal protector
(Single operation)
95 5
Backup heater 1
Backup heater 2
BRW
1L1 3L2
BLU
Power supply
220 - 230V~ 50Hz
or
380 - 400V~ 50Hz
Thermal protector
(Single operation)
95 5
Thermal protector
(Single operation)
95 5
Backup heater 1
Backup heater 2
HWS-P805XWHT6-E
HWS-P1105XWHT6-E
HWS-P805XWHT6TR
HWS-P1105XWHT6TR
BLU
Outdoor unit
BRW
1 2 3
BRW
11 12 13 TB 01
BRW
RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
WHI
CN603
(YEL)
ON
41 42 43 44 TB 04
3WV
Type 2
(3-wire SPST type)
CN211
(BLK)
RED
WHI
1 1
1
2
3
4
SW14
ON
3
RED
BRW
BLU
WHI
57 58 59 TB 05
CN210
(RED)
GRY
WHI
YEL
3WV
Type 1
(2-wire spring return)
CN208
(BLU)
1 2 3 4
3 3
BRW
RED
05
BH
*Option p.c.board
CN209
(GRN)
SW02
RY601
BRW
A2 RY A1
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 TB 05
CN213
(WHI)
SW01
CN500
(BLU)
RY600
BRW
3
1
1 2 3
CN214
(WHI)
1
YEL-GRN
F9, F10
AC250V
T3.15A
BLU
BLU
3 3
2 2
1 1
1 2
1 2
CN212
(WHI)
ON
YEL-GRN
BLU
2
1 2 3 4
OFF
BLU
6A 6B 6C 6D TB 06
P.C.board
(MCC-1511)
CN501
(YEL)
Relay
p.c.board
(MCC-1431)
F01 (5A)
WPM
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2
1 2
PNK
CN01
(WHI)
5
4
3
2
1
3
1
1 2 3
WHI
CR13
CN02
(WHI)
RED
BLU
ORN
GRN
BRW
5
4
3
2
1
1 2
1 2
ORN
RY
12
RY
13
5
4
3
2
1
3
1
1 2 3
WHI
CR11
CR12
BLK
YEL
1 2
1 2
CN203 CN204 CN205 CN206 CN207
(YEL) (BRW) (RED) (WHI) (BLU)
RY602
3 3
2
1 1
CR10
BRW
WPM 2WV
23 4
23 4
1 2
1 2
CN41
(BLU)
CN10
(WHI)
TFI
A B
BRW
BRW
GRY
WHI
GRY
9 9
8
BLU
7 7
6
BRW
5 5
4
3
2
WHI
1 1
TTW
1 23 4
23 4
3
1
1 2 3
YEL
WHI WHI
*Option
TB 07 7A 7B
BLU : BLUE
GRN : GREEN
ORN : ORANGE
RED : RED
YEL : YELLOW
WHI
THO
LPS
Color identification
RED
TWO
A B
Electric shock may happen.
Don't touch the electric parts.
BLK : BLACK
BRW : BROWN
GRY : GRAY
PNK : PINK
WHI : WHITE
TWI
RED
CAUTION
TC
A B
RED
Remote
controller
(HWS-AMS54E)
RED
WARNING
Perform the grounding from the
earth terminal in the terminal
block of the outdoor unit.
F3,F4
Fuse
AC250V
T30A
L
N
TB 02
Power supply
220 - 230V~ 50Hz
HWS-P805XWHM3-E
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E
HWS-P805XWHM3TR
HWS-P1105XWHM3TR
1 HWS-P805XWHT6TR : Installed
: Installed
*1 HWS-P805XWHT6-E
HWS-P1105XWHT6-E : Installed * HWS-P1105XWHT6TR : Installed
HWS-P805XWHT9-E : Installed
HWS-P1105XWHT9-E : Installed
HWS-P805XWHM3-E : Not installed
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E : Not installed
20
HWS-P1105XWHT9TR : Installed
HWS-P805XWHM3TR : Not installed
HWS-P1105XWHM3TR : Not installed
5-2. Outdoor unit
HWS-P805HR-E, HWS-P1105HR-E
HWS-P805HR-E, -P805HRTR
HWS-P1105HR-E, -P1105HRTR
Reactor
(Gray)
P04 P05
CN300
(White)
CN609
(Blue)
1 1
2 2
TD
t°
TO
t°
TE
t°
TS
t°
CN610
(Yellow)
1 1
2 2
CN604
(White)
1 1
2
3 3
CN603
(White)
1 1
2 2
CN602
(Yellow)
1 1
2 2
CN601
(White)
1 1
2
3 3
CN600
(White)
SW804
CN606
(Red)
SW801
1 1
2 2
3 3
1 1
SV
3 3
1 1
2
3 3
4 4
(White)
(Black)
PD
(Red)
Fuse, F01
T25 A, 250 V ~
RY704
P09
CN704 1
(Blue)
(Black)
Fuse, F03
T10 A, 250 V ~
3
1
1
4
4
CN04
(White)
CN701
(White)
20SF
7
7
P01
(Red)
1
2
3
1
2
3
P02
(Black)
Earth
screw
Earth
screw
Outdoor
unit
Hydro
unit
Part name
5
5
3
3
1
1
(Gray)
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
1 2 3 4
1 1
SW803
PMV
Symbol
CM
FM01
FM02
PMV
TD
TS
TE
TL
TO
20SF
SV
PD
49C
RY
L/F
63H
Fuse
T3.15 A 250 V ~
L/F
SW802
CN710
(White)
CN702
(White)
SW800
(Red)
t°
1
2
3
4
5
6
P.C. board
MCC-1571
(White)
TL
CN200 CN201 CN202
P06 P07
Fuse
T3.15 A 250 V ~
1 2 3 4
FM02
1 1
2 2
3 3
t°>
(Red) (White) (Black)
U
V
W
(White)
CN703
(Gray)
ON
CN400
(White)
1 2 3 4
1 1
2 2
3 3
ON
FM01
49C
(Gray) (White)
Red
1 2 3 4
1 1
2 2
P>
ON
63H
CM
Reactor
L
(White)
N
Power Supply
220 - 230 V ~ 50 Hz
Earth
screw
Compressor
Fan motor
Pulse motor valve
Pipe temperature sensor(Discharge)
Pipe temperature sensor(Suction)
Heat exchanger sensor 1
Heat exchanger sensor 2
Outside temperature sensor
4-way valve coil
2-way valve coil
Pressure sensor
Compressor case thermostat
Relay
Line Filter
High-pressure switch
1.
indicates the terminal block. Alphanumeric characters
in the cycle indicate the terminal No.
2.The two-dot chain line indicates the wiring procured locally.
3.
indicates the P.C. board.
4.For the hydro unit circuit, refer to the wiring diagram
of the hydro unit.
21
Heater
5-3. Hot water cylinder unit
Blue
Green /
Yellow
Double pole thermal cut out
Blue
Brown
Brown
1 2
TB03 (230 V)
A B
TB06 (TTW)
TTW sensor
Hot water cylinder heater
Supply 220 - 230 V from hydro unit
Cable size 1.5 mm2 (minimum)
To hydro unit
22
6
Key electric component rating
6-1. Hydro unit
HWS-P805XWHM3-E, T6-E, T9-E
No.
Component name
Model name
M3-E T6-E T9-E
Type name
Rating
UPM 2K 25-60 130 AC230 V 0.40 A (MAX)
1
Circulation pump
O
2
Backup heater 3 kW
O
3
Backup heater 6 kW
4
Backup heater 9 kW
5
Water heat exchange
temperature sensor
(TC sensor)
O
O
O
–
6
Water inlet temperature sensor
(TWI sensor)
O
O
O
–
7
Water outlet temperature sensor
(TWO sensor)
O
O
O
–
8
Heater outlet water temperature
sensor
(THO sensor)
O
O
O
–
9
Floor inlet temperature sensor
(TFI sensor)
O
O
O
–
10
Low pressure sensor
O
O
O
–
Operating pressure 0.20 MPa
11
Bimetal thermostat (auto)
O
O
O
–
Operating temperature 75±3 °C DC12 V / 0.2 A
12
Bimetal thermostat (single
operation)
O
O
O
–
13
Flow switch
O
O
O
–
14
Output board (OP)
OP
OP
OP
TCB-PCIN3E
AC230 V 0.5 A, DC24 V 1 A
15
Input board (OP)
OP
OP
OP
TCB-PCM03E
Contact input
16
Remote controller (Main)
O
O
O
HWS-AMS54E
17
Remote controller (Sub)
OP
OP
OP
HWS-AMS54E
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A
2Wire, 3Wire SPST, SPDT type mountable
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A 2Wire type mountable
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A
3Wire SPST, SPDT type mountable
18
19
20
Water 3-way valve terminal
Water 2-way valve terminal
Mixing valve terminal
O
O
O
O
SA3-23652B
AC230 V 3 kW
SA3-23652B
AC400 V (3N) 6 kW
SA3-23652B
AC400 V (3N) 9 kW
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
Operating temperature 95±5 °C AC250 V / 16 A
Operating flowing quantity 13
21
Circulation pump terminal
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 1.0 A
22
Booster heater terminal
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 1.0 A
23
Fuse
O
O
O
–
AC250 V 30 A
O ······· Applied
OP ····· Optional accessory
23
/min
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, T6-E, T9-E
No.
Component name
Model name
M3-E T6-E T9-E
Type name
Rating
1
Circulation pump
O
2
Backup heater 3 kW
O
3
Backup heater 6 kW
4
Backup heater 9 kW
5
Water heat exchange
temperature sensor
(TC sensor)
O
O
O
–
6
Water inlet temperature sensor
(TWI sensor)
O
O
O
–
7
Water outlet temperature sensor
(TWO sensor)
O
O
O
–
8
Heater outlet water temperature
sensor
(THO sensor)
O
O
O
–
9
Floor inlet temperature sensor
(TFI sensor)
O
O
O
–
10
Low pressure sensor
O
O
O
–
Operating pressure 0.20 MPa
11
Thermal protector (auto)
O
O
O
–
Operating temperature 75±3 °C DC42 V / 0.2 A
12
Thermal protector (single
operation)
O
O
O
–
13
Flow switch
O
O
O
–
14
Output board (OP)
OP
OP
OP
TCB-PCIN3E
AC230 V 0.5 A, DC24 V 1 A
15
Input board (OP)
OP
OP
OP
TCB-PCM03E
Contact input
16
Remote controller (Main)
O
O
O
HWS-AMS54E
17
Remote controller (Sub)
OP
OP
OP
HWS-AMS54E
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A
2Wire, 3Wire SPST, SPDT type mountable
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A 2Wire type mountable
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 0.1 A
3Wire SPST, SPDT type mountable
18
19
20
Water 3-way valve terminal
Water 2-way valve terminal
Mixing valve terminal
O
O
O
O
UPM GEO 25-85 130 AC230 V 0.66 A (MAX)
SA3-23652B
AC230 V 3 kW
SA3-23652B
AC400 V (3N) 6 kW
SA3-23652B
AC400 V (3N) 9 kW
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
10 kΩ (25 °C)
Operating temperature 95±5 °C AC250 V 16 A
Operating flowing quantity 18 L/min
21
Circulation pump terminal
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 1.0 A
22
Booster heater terminal
O
O
O
–
AC230 V 1.0 A
23
Fuse
O
O
O
–
AC250 V 30 A
O ······· Applied
OP ····· Optional accessory
24
6-2. Outdoor unit
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
No.
Component name
Type name
Rating
1
Compressor
DA422A3F-26M
2
Outdoor fan motor (x2)
ICF-280-A100-1
Output 100 W
3
Reactor (x2)
CH-44
1.4 mH, 25 A
4
4-way valve coil
STF-H01AP1874A1
AC220 - 230 V full-wave rectifier input, alive time 10 sec or less
5
Pulse motor valve (PMV) coil
UKV-A038
DC12 V
6
Compressor case thermostat
US-622KXTMQO-SS
OFF = 125 ± 4 °C, ON = 90 ± 5 °C
7
PC board
MCC-1571
Input 1Ø, AC220 - 230 V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
8
High pressure sensor
NSK-BH042D-430
0 ~ 4.15 MPa
9
2-way valve coil
VPV-MOAJ510B0
AC220 - 240 V
10
High pressure switch
ACB-4UB154W
OFF = 4.15 + 0, -0.15 MPa
6-3. Hot water cylinder unit
Model name
No.
Component name
1501
CSH
M3-E
(-UK)
2101
CSH
M3-E
(-UK)
3001
CSH
M3-E
(-UK)
Type name
1
Hot water cylinder heater
O
O
O
–
2
Hot water cylinder temperature
sensor
(TTW sensor)
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
3
Thermal cut-out
Rating
AC230 V 2.7 kW
10 kΩ (25 °C)
O ······· Applied
25
Operating temperature
Manual reset 82 °C (+3K/-2K)
6-4. Water heat exchange control board
HWS-P805XWHM3-E, P805XWHT6-E, P805XWHT9-E
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, P1105XWHT6-E, P1105XWHT9-E
PWM signal line
connector
CN500
TC sensor connector
TTW sensor connector
CN203
CN214
Low pressure sensor connector
Remote controller
TFI sensor
CN207, CN212
connector
connector
CN41
CN213
THO sensor connector
CN206
TWI sensor connector
CN204
TWO sensor connector
CN205
Relay board
connector
CN501
Overheat protection thermostat
input connector
CN202
Flow switch connector
CN200
Option board
connector
CN208-CN211
Transformer connector
CN102
Built-in circulation
pump connector
CN603
Transformer input connector
CN101
Hot water cylinder
drive connector
CN601
AC power supply connector
CN100
3WV drive connector
CN602
Mixing valve drive
connector
CN604
Backup heater 1 drive
connector
CN605
Serial input connector
CN305
Backup heater 2 drive connector
CN606
26
6-5. Outdoor control board
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
Fan motor output (Lower)
CN300(White)
Fan motor output (Upper)
CN400(White)
Case thermostat connector
CN609(Blue)
Compressor output terminals
CN202
CN201
CN200
Electrolytic capacitors
Power circuit
protection fuse
F100(250 V, 3.15 A,
plastic case)
High-pressure switch
connector CN690 (Red)
4-way valve connector
CN701(White)
Compressor ON output
connector
CN704(Blue)
Heater output
connector
CN703(Grey)
2-way valve
CN702(White)
External input connector
CN610(Yellow)
Special operation switches
SW801
SW804
Display change-over
switches
SW800
SW803
Temperature sensor
connectors
TL CN604(White)
TD CN603(White)
TO CN602(Yellow)
TE CN601(White)
TS CN600(White)
Power supply connection
lead wires
P01(Red)
P02(White)
PD sensor
CN606(Red)
Alive, abnormal display LEDs
D800 804(Yellow)
D805(Green)
PMV connector
CN710(White)
Initialization switch
SW802
Hydro-outdoor communication
signal LEDs
D503 (Green, Outdoor =>Hydro)
D502 (Amber, Hydro => Outdoor)
4-way valve protection fuse
F700(250 V, 3.15 A
plastic case)
Earth lead wire
P09(Black)
Connecting cable connector
CN04(White)
Connecting cable protection fuse
F03(250 V, 10 A)
27
Power supply protection fuses
F01
(250 V, 25 A)
28
Outdoor unit
TC
Ø3 : 6 kW
Ø3 : 9 kW
Backup heater
Ø1 : 3 kW
Air vent valve
Local hot water system
3.5 bar
Reducing
valve (UK)
Pressure relief
Set value : 7 bar (UK)
Water heat exchanger
max : 10bar
TWO
Overpressure preventive
valve
set : 4.3bar
Thermal protector
Single operation
set : 95 ± 5 °C
Water outlet
Flow sw
Water inlet
TWI
TTW
Circulation pump
max : 10 bar
Hot water cylinder
Water vent
valve
Thermal cut-out
(manual reset)
82 °C (+3K/-2K)
Manometer
gage : 6bar
Thermal protector
(auto)
set : 75 ± 3 °C
THO
Booster heater
(local)
Cylinder heater
Ø1 : 2.7 kW
Relief valve(UK)
90 °C
10 bar
Drain cock for water charge
(locally procured)
40 mesh
Safety valve
set : 3.5bar
Motorized 3-way valve
(locally procured)
AC230 V
Strainer
(locally procured)
M
Low pressure sensor
Expansion vessel
set : 1bar
Boiler
(local)
Floor
heating
zone2
TFI
Circulation pump
(locally procured)
2-way valve for
cooling mode
(locally procured)
AC230 V
zone1
Buffer tank (locally procured)
Motorized mixing valve
(locally procured)
AC230 V
By-pass valve
(locally procured)
Radiator unit
By-pass valve
(locally procured)
Fan coil unit
7
Refrigeration cycle / Water system diagram
7-1. Water system diagram
M
Installation example of water circuit
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The water flowing for a system without buffer tank ((1), (2), (3), (5)) requires18 /min (P805XWH 13 /min) or more.
This water flowing requires 5 or more branches of Floor heating or Radiator etc.
Less than 5 branches may cause a flow deficiency. In this case, please provide a buffer tank and secondary pumps
as shown in (4).
Please check how to install the boiler (See page 40)
29
7-2. Refrigeration cycle system diagram
HWS-P805XWHM3-E, HWS-P805XWHT6-E, HWS-P805XWHT9-E,
HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, HWS-P1105XWHT6-E, HWS-P1105XWHT9-E /
HWS-P805HR-E, HWS-P1105HR-E
Outdoor unit
Hydro unit
Heating / Hot water supply
Defrosting / Cooling
High-pressure switch
High pressure
sensor (PD)
Expansion vessel
Low pressure
sensor
2-way valve
4-way valve
Plate-type
water heat
exchanger
TD
Compressor
Manometer
TWO
Water vent valve
Safety
valve
Air vent valve
Backup heater
Outdoor heat exchanger
TS
TL
TC
P
THO
PMV
Circulation pump
Accumulator
TO
TWI
TE
Flow switch
30
8
Operational description
This chapter describes the working circuit and control of Air to Water Heat Pump about the following operations.
Item
Page
8-1
8-1. Basic Operation
1) Operation control
2) Hot water supply operation
3) Heating operation
4) Cooling operation
32 to 34
8-2
8-2. Operation Mode and Control Method
1) Heat pump operation range of hot water supply, heating and cooling
2) Hot water supply operation
3) Heating operation
4) Cooling operation
5) Simultaneous operations of "hot water supply" and "heating"
6) Simultaneous operations of "hot water supply" and "cooling"
7) Boiler control
8) Hot water boost operation
9) Anti bacteria operation
10) Night setback operation
11) Frost protection operation
12) Auto operation
13) Night time low-noise operation
35 to 46
8-3
8-3. Hydro Unit Control
1) Capacity control (compressor, high-temperature release, low-temperature release)
2) Heater control
3) Circulation pump control
4) Control by the flow switch
5) Mixing Valve control (2-temperature heating control)
6) Room temperature control
7) Room temperature control with the thermostat
8) Hot water cylinder thermostat control
9) Control of force stop and restart
10) Control of limit of heat pump operation
11)Output signal control 1
12)Output signal control 2
13) Q-H characteristics of hydro unit
14) Automatic restart control
15) Piping freeze prevention control
16) High return water protect control
46 to 61
8-4
8-4. Outdoor unit control
1) PMV (Pulse motor valve) control
2) Discharge temperature release control
3) Current release control
4) Current releases shift control
5) Outdoor fan control
6) Defrosting control
7) Winding heating control
8) Short circuit operation prevention control
9) Over current protection control
10) High pressure release control
11) Compressor case thermostat
12) Bottom plate heater control
13) 2-way valve control
14) Start up from hibernation
62 to 70
31
Item
8-1.
Basic
Operation
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
1) Operation control
Remote controller
Operation
condition selection
Heating: Run/Stop
Remote controller settings
<Heating> Temperature setting
<Hot water supply > Temperature setting
<Cooling> Temperature setting
Hot water supply: Run/Stop
Cooling: Run/Stop
Serial signals transmit
and receive
Auto Temp
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Hot water boost
AC 220~230 V for Hot water cylinder heater
AC 380~400 V (3N~) for Back up heater
Hydro
unit
Thermostat (Cooling/Heating)
Serial signals
transmit and receive
Water heat
exchange
Sub board
2WV_W
3WV_W
Hot water supply
heater MG
Mixing Valve
Low pressure sensor
Water heat
exchange
control board
Serial signals
transmit and receive
Forcible stop input
Error Alarm stop output
Defrosting output
Operation output
Boiler "ON/OFF"
Booster Heater
Condensed temperature sensor (TC)
Water inlet temperature sensor (TWI)
Water outlet temperature sensor (TWO)
Water heater outlet temperature sensor (THO)
Hot water cylinder sensor (TTW)
Floor inlet sensor (TFI)
Overheat prevention thermostat
Flow switch
Hot water cylinder heater
Backup heater 1 power-relay
Backup heater 2 power-relay
Pump 1 (Built-in circulation pump)
Outdoor
unit
Serial
communication
Serial signals
transmit and receive
Outdoor
unit control
AC 220 - 230 V for heat pump
Outdoor unit control
Compressor
Inverter
Inverter frequency control
Outdoor fan motor
Waveform synthesis function
PD sensor
Calculation function (Temperature calculation)
TD sensor
AD conversion function
TS sensor
Rapid heating function
TE sensor
Compressor restart
TO sensor
Delay function
PMV
G-Tr overcurrent prevention function
4-way valve
Defrosting operation function
2-way valve
Bottom plate heater
High pressure switch
32
Operation description
1. Purpose
The operations of the
hydro unit and the
outdoor unit are
controlled according to
user-defined operation
condition settings.
2. Details
The operation controls
include those shown on
the left.
3. Operations
1) An operation condition
is selected with the
remote controller.
2) Setting the remote
controller button to
“ON” transmits a signal
to the hydro unit.
3) The hydro unit
controller controls the
operations shown on
the left while also
controlling the water 2way valve, water 3-way
valve, circulation
pump, mixing valve,
hot water cylinder
heater, and backup
heater.
4) The hydro unit
controller transmits an
operation instruction to
the outdoor unit, and
uses serial signals to
transmit and receive
control statuses.
5) The outdoor unit
control unit performs
the operation controls
shown on the left while
also controlling the
compressor, outdoor
fan motor, pulse motor
valve, 4-way valve, 2way valve, and bottom
plate heater.
Item
8-1.
Basic
Operation
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
2) Hot water supply operation
Hot water supply
operation start
Hydro unit
control
Hot water temperature: 40 °C to 75 °C
Circulation pump "ON/OFF" control
Water 3-way valve control
Hot water cylinder heater control
Operation instruction
signal transmit
Outdoor unit
control
Number of compressor revolutions control
Number of outdoor fan motor revolutions control
Pulse motor valve control
4-way valve control
3) Heating operation
Heating operation
start
Hydro unit
control
Operation instruction
signal transmit
Outdoor unit
control
Heating temperature: 20 °C to 60 °C
Circulation pump "ON/OFF" control
Water 3-way valve control
Water 2-way valve control
Mixing Valve control
Backup heater control
Booster heater control
Number of compressor revolutions control
Number of outdoor fan motor revolutions control
Pulse motor valve control
4-way valve control
33
Operation description
Hot water supply operation
1. Purpose
Hot water supply
2. Details
This section performs
hot water supply
operation according to
heating conditions
specified for the steps
on the left.
3. Operations
1) By pressing the [
]
button on the remote
controller, the hydro
unit controller starts to
transmit a hot water
supply operation signal
to the outdoor unit.
2) The hydro unit
performs the operation
controls shown on the
left while also
controlling the
circulation pump, hot
water cylinder heater
“3WV”.
3) The outdoor unit
controls the
compressor, outdoor
fan motor, electric
expansion valve, and
4-way valve based on
the operation signals
transmitted by the
hydro unit.
Heating operation
1. Purpose
Heating
2. Details
This section performs
heating operation
according to heating
conditions specified for
the steps on the left.
3. Operations
1) By pressing the [
]
button on the remote
controller, the hydro
unit controller starts to
transmit a heating
operation signal to the
outdoor unit.
2) The hydro unit
performs the operation
controls shown on the
left while also
controlling the
circulation pump,
backup booster heater
“ON/OFF”, water 2way valve, and water 3way valve.
3) The outdoor unit
controls the
compressor, outdoor
fan motor, electric
expansion valve, and
4-way valve based on
the operation signals
transmitted by the
hydro unit.
Item
8-1.
Basic
Operation
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
4) Cooling operation
Cooling operation
start
Cooling temperature: 7 °C to 25 °C
Hydro unit
control
Circulation pump "ON/OFF" control
Water 3-way valve control
Water 2-way valve control
Operation instruction
signal transmit
Outdoor unit
control
Number of compressor revolutions control
Number of outdoor fan motor revolutions control
Pulse motor valve control
4-way valve control
34
Operation description
1. Purpose
Cooling
2. Details
This section performs
cooling operation
according to cooling
conditions specified for
the steps on the left.
3. Operations
1) By pressing the [
]
button on the remote
controller, the hydro
unit controller starts to
transmit a cooling
operation signal to the
outdoor unit.
2) The hydro unit
controller performs the
operation controls
shown on the left while
also controlling the
circulation pump, water
2-way valve, and water
3-way valve.
3) The outdoor unit
controls the
compressor, outdoor
fan motor, pulse motor
valve, and 4-way valve
based on the operation
signals transmitted by
the hydro unit.
Item
1) Heat pump operation range of hot water supply, heating and cooling
The heat pump operation range of hot water supply, heating and cooling is shown on the figures below.
• HWS-P805XWH**-E
• HWS-P1105XWH**-E
To
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
44
42
40
Cooling operation range
38
Heater operation
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
Heat pump operation
range of hot water
supply and heating.
*With the exception of TO 25 °C
or higher for heating.
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-16
Heat pump operation range of
hot water supply and heating
Freeze determination is
executed only once.
-18
-20
-22
-24
-26
-28
-30
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60
Water temperature at inlet (TWI)
35
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
The following shows the operation modes and controlled objects.
Operation
mode
Heating and Hot water both operate
Cooling
only
Heating
only
Hot
water
supply
only
Controlled
object
Heat pump select
for heating
Heat pump select
for hot water
supply
Cooling and Hot water both operate
Heat pump select
for hot water
supply
Heat pump select
for cooling
Heating
side
Hot
water
supply
side
Heating
side
Hot
water
supply
side
Cooling
side
Hot
water
supply
side
Cooling
side
Hot
water
supply
side
Heat pump
O
O
O
O
×
×
O
O
×
×
O
Backup
heater
×
O
×
O
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Hot water
cylinder
heater
×
×
O
×
O
×
O
×
O
×
O
O Possible
× Not possible
2) Hot water supply operation
1) Operation start condition
] remote controller button is pressed and the
When the [
following operation start condition is met, the operation starts.
• TTW < 38 °C is detected.
2) Operation mode determination
An operation mode is determined according to the temperature
of TTW sensor.
• Heat pump operation selection *1 *2
• When TTW < 38 °C (a zone in the right figure) is met, the
heat pump operation is selected.
• Heater operation selection
When 45 °C ≤ TTW < TSC_H (b zone in the right figure) is
met, the heater operation is selected.
• Thermostat status "OFF" selection
When TTW ≥ TSC_H is met, the thermostat status "OFF" is
selected.
3) Operation stop
The operation stops in the following cases.
• The remote controller gives a stop instruction.
• TTW ≥ TSC_H is met.
*1: When the outside temperature is -25 °C or below, the heater
operation is selected even if the TTW temperature falls into
"a zone".
*2: When "Hot water supply" and "Heating" are simultaneously in
operation, the heater operation may be selected depending on
the outside air temperature.
TTW sensor
(Hot water cylinder unit)
TTW
TSC_H
(Temperature set with Thermostat OFF c Zone
remote controller)
Heater operation
b Zone
HP_H OFF 45 °C
HP_H ON 38 °C
Heat pump
operation
a Zone
TSC_H is hot water temperature
set with remote controller
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
Default
Setting available range
1E
Upper limit of hot water supply temperature
75 °C
60-80 °C
1F
Lower limit of hot water supply temperature
40 °C
40-60 °C
20-45 °C
20
Heat pump start temperature
38 °C
21
Heat pump end temperature
45 °C
40-50 °C
24
Outside air correction start temperature for hot water supply*3
0 °C
-20-10 °C
25
Outside air correction temperature for hot water supply*3
3 degree
0 -15 degree
*3:When the outside temperature is 0 °C or below, the boil-up temperature will be higher that setting temperature in hot
water supply mode.
36
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
3) Heating operation
<Operation only for ZONE1>
• This operation is enabled when DP_SW12_2 ZONE1 is set to "OFF" (default).
• The remote controller displays
settings, and only the set temperature of
can be changed.
<Operation for ZONE1 and ZONE2 (2 temperatures control)>
• This operation is enabled when DP_SW12_2 ZONE1 is set to "OFF" (default) and DP_SW12_3 ZONE2 to "ON".
• The remote controller displays
settings, and the set temperatures of
can be changed.
• To set temperatures for
and
, use SELECT
to switch between
and
.
• For 2 zone temperatures control, the flow adjustment of MIXING VALVE controls the water temperature of
. For details,
see the description on MIXING VALVE control in 8-3-5. (See page 52)
1) Operation start condition
] button of remote controller starts a heating
Pressing the [
operation. *1 *2
2) Operation mode selection
An operation mode is determined according to the temperature
of TWI sensor.
• Heat pump operation selection *1 *2
When TWI < TSC_F (d zone in the right figure) is met, the
heat pump operation is selected.
• Thermostat status "OFF"
When TWI ≥ TSC_F (e zone in the right figure) is met, the
thermostat status "OFF" is selected.
TWI
Thermostat off
operation
e zone
TSC_F
diff2K
d zone
Heat pump operation
TSC_F is a heating temperature
set with remote controller
3) Operation stop condition
When the following condition is met, the heating operation
stops.
• The remote controller gives a stop instruction.
*1: When the outside temperature is -25 °C or below, the heater
operation is selected even if the TWI temperature falls into
"d zone".
*2: When "Hot water supply" and "Heating" are simultaneously in
operation, the heater operation may be selected depending on
the outside air temperature.
Related FC
FC No.
Default
Setting available range
1A
Upper limit of heating (Zone1) limited temperature
Setting item
60
37-60 °C
1B
Lower limit of heating (Zone1) limited temperature
20
20-37 °C
1C
Upper limit of heating (Zone2) limited temperature
60
37-60 °C
1D
Lower limit of heating (Zone2) limited temperature
20
20-37 °C
37
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
4) Cooling operation
] button and then [OPERATION MODE] starts a cooling operation.
Pressing the [
1) Operation start condition
] button and then [OPERATION MODE]
Pressing the [
starts a cooling operation.
2) Operation mode selection
An operation mode is determined according to the
temperature of TWI sensor.
TWI
TSC_F+2K or 12 °C
(Temperature set with
remote controller)
d zone
Heat pump operation
(cooling)
Diff : 2K
e zone
TSC_F
Thermostat off operation
• Heat pump operation selection *1
When TWI ≥ TSC_F (d zone in the right figure) is met, the
heat pump operation is selected.
• Thermostat status "OFF"
When TWI < TSC_F (e zone in the right figure) is met, the
thermostat status "OFF" is selected.
TSC is a cooling temperature
set with the remote controller
3) Operation stop condition
When either of the following conditions is met, the cooling
operation stops.
• The remote controller gives a stop instruction.
• The operation is switched to heating.
*1: When the outside temperature is 10 °C or below, cooling does
not start even if the TWI temperature falls into "d zone".
Related FC
FC No.
Default
Setting available range
02
Cooling mode availability
Setting item
0
0: Permitted
18
Upper limit of cooling setting temperature
25
18-30 °C
19
Lower limit of cooling setting temperature
7
7-20 °C
5) Simultaneous operations of "hot water supply" and "heating"
At the time of "Hot water supply" and "Heating" simultaneous
operation, the operation mode is select as follows depending on
the outside air temperature.
• f zone Operation with hot water supply priority
A heat pump operation is performed in the hot water supply
side, and a heating operation in the heating side.
The heat pump maintains a supply of hot water for up to
30 minutes during a simultaneous operation.
• g zone Operation with heating priority
A heat pump operation is performed in the heating side, and
a cylinder heater operation in the hot water supply side.
TO
Hot water
supply heat
pump priority
operation
0
(FC22) Heating heat
pump priority
operation
-25
Heater operation
f zone
Diff : 5deg
g zone
Diff : 5deg
h zone *3
Operation mode by zone
Zone
Hot water supply side
f
Heat pump *2
Heating side
Stop *2
g
Heater
Heat pump
h
Heater *3
Heater *3
*2: Note that after a heat pump operation for "Hot water supply" is selected in f zone, when the operation moves to a
heater operation for "hot water" and then 5 minutes has passed (Hot water supply operation in b zone), the operation
mode changes as follows.
Zone
Hot water supply side
Heating side
f'
Heater
Heat pump
When TTW ≥ 45 °C (FC: 21) is met, the operation ends f' zone and returns to f zone.
*3: If the h-zone operation starts while external temperature is higher than -25 °C, the h-zone operation continues for
60 minutes.
38
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
Related FC
FC No.
22
*
Setting item
Priority mode switch temperature
Default
Setting available range
0 °C
-20-20 °C
Note: When user selects “hot water supply” and “ZONE1,2”, and Heat pump selects hot water supply mode, the
Maximum operating time of heat pump is 30 min.
6) Simultaneous operations of "hot water supply" and "cooling"
For simultaneous operations of "hot water supply" and "cooling", basically cooling runs by a heat pump operation, and
hot water supply by a heater operation.
Normal
Hot water supply side
Cooling side
Heater *
Heat pump *
* By setting FC_0F to “1”, heat pump operation for “hot water supply” is permitted. Under the setting, the heat pump
runs for the hot water supply side when TTW is less than 38 °C.
TTW<38 °C
Hot water supply side
Cooling side
Heat pump
stop
The operation mode returns to normal when TTW become 45 °C or more (FC: variable).
Related FC
FC No.
0F
Setting item
Heat pump operation for hot water supply permitted / not
permitted
39
Default
Setting available range
0: Not permit
1:Permitted (Heat pump
may run for hot water
supply.)
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
7) Boiler control
The boiler assists the hot water supply operation and heating operation according to the boiler’s position.
7-1) Boiler setting
• TCB-PCIN3E optional PC board is required. Connect its connection cable to CN208 port on the PC board of the
hydro unit.
• Setting DPSW on the hydro unit: DP_SW13_2=”ON/OFF” switches “Using boiler / Not using boiler (Default)”.
Set the switch to “ON” when using the boiler.
• The temperature switching the boiler and heat pump: FC_23=-10 °C (Default) See the next item.
The boiler output becomes effective when the outside air temperature is -10 °C or less.
• Boiler position setting: DP_SW02_1=”ON/OFF” must be switched in accordance with the boiler position from the
3-way valve; before the 3-way valve / after the 3-way valve and in the heating side (Default).
When the switch is set to “ON”, the boiler runs in the hot water supply operations or heating operation. The action
of the 3-way valve depends on heat pump’s action and the boiler follows their action.
When the switch is set to “OFF”, the boiler runs in heating operation. Also, the boiler runs when the heat pump is
running for hot water supply while heating and supplying hot water simultaneously.
• Priority setting between the boiler and hydro unit: FC_3E=”0/1” switches the running priority; hydro unit (Default) /
boiler.
When FC_3E is set to “0” (Default), the hydro unit has priority, the boiler stops as temperature reaches the hydro
unit’s temperature setting.
When FC_3E is set to “1”, the boiler continues to run even after temperature reaches the hydro unit’s temperature
setting. (The setting of FC_3E is effective during the HP+Boiler operation.)
• Coordination setting of the boiler and heat pump: when FC_5B=”0”, the boiler and heat pump runs simultaneously.
When FC_5B=”1”, only the boiler runs, pump ON. (However, if the external air temperature becomes the boiler-HP
switching temperature or more within 60 minutes)
When FC_5B=”2”, the heater runs. (the heater may run instead for up to 60 minutes.)
When FC_5B=”3”, only the boiler runs. (Pump OFF:Default)
DP_SW10_3 should be “OFF (Default)”
<Installation example>
DP_SW02_1=“OFF”(The boiler is placed after the 3-way valve and in the heating side.)
TO<=-10*
-10*<TO
HEATING
Boiler + HP**
HP
HOT WATER
HP
HP
HEATING & HOT
WATER
Boiler for heating
HP for hot water
or heating
HP
COOLING
–
HP (TO≥10)
COOLING & HOT
WATER
HP for cooling
Heater for hot
water***
HP for cooling
Heater for hot water***
Option
Boiler
Outdoor
unit
Hydro
Buffer
Radiator
* Boiler & HP switching temp setting FC23= -10
** Boiler control / functionality setting FC5B= 0 (HP+Boiler)
*** Hot water & cooling priority setting (FC_0F=“1” hot water
priority is necessary.)
DP_SW02_1=“ON”(The boiler is placed before the 3-way valve.)
Boiler
Outdoor
Unit
Hydro unit
Buffer tank
Radiator
* Boiler & HP switching temp setting FC23= -10
** Boiler control / functionality setting FC5B= 0 (HP+Boiler)
*** Hot water & cooling priority setting (FC_0F=“1” hot water
priority is necessary)
40
TO<=-10*
-10*<TO
HEATING
Boiler + HP**
HP
HOT WATER
Boiler + HP**
HP
HEATING & HOT
WATER
Boiler + HP**
HP
COOLING
–
HP (TO≥10)
COOLING & HOT
WATER
HP for cooling
Heater for hot
water***
HP for cooling
Heater for hot water***
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
7-2) Boiler-output control
• I zone: heat pump operation
Normally the heat pump operation is executed in the zone.
• J zone: heat pump operation and boiler operation *1
In the zone, the heat pump + boiler operation (*2) is executed and the heater operation is executed in the hot-watersupply side.
TO
I zone
Heat pump
operation
E
-10
Diff : 5K
J zone
Heat pump &
boiler operation
*2:Operation mode is not changed with the outside temperature when an external signal to control the limit of heat
pump limit operation (see 8-3-10) is input.
7-3) Boiler output limit control
The boiler power output is limited depending on the settings of boiler position (DPSW02_1) and FC62.
FC62
(Activate/deactivate A02 error
detection)
Temperature range in which the boiler signal is output
(Detected temperature of TWI, TWO or THO)
OFF
(After 3-way valve, heating side)
0
TWI or TWO or THO<58 °C
1
TWI or TWO or THO<58 °C
ON
(Before 3-way valve)
0
TWI or TWO or THO<70 °C
1
No limit *1
Boiler position
(DPSW02_1)
7-4) A02 error detection while the boiler is running
A02 error detection is deactivated depending on the settings of FC62 and whether the boiler is installed or not
(DPSW13_2).
FC62
Boiler is installed or not (Activate/deactivate A02
(DPSW13_2)
error detection)
Temperature recognized as A02 error
(Detected temperature of TWI, TWO or
THO)
OFF
(Not installed)
0
TWI or TWO or THO≥70 °C (Beep)
1
TWI or TWO or THO≥70 °C (Beep)
ON
(Installed)
0
TWI or TWO or THO≥70 °C (Beep)
1
No error detection *1 (No beep)
*1 If a user runs the boiler under the condition that no limit has been set, and hot water from the boiler has damaged parts
inside of the hydro unit, the user is fully responsible for the damage.
7-5)2 zone temperature control while the boiler is running
2 zone temperature control by boiler with P1 OFF is required DPSW10_3 OFF
Boiler is installed
(DPSW13_2)
ZONE2 operation is
using
(DPSW12_3)
P2 synchronize
with P1
(DPSW10_3)
FC5B
Coordination of the
boiler and heat pump
2 zone temperature control
P1 / P2 / Mixing Valve control
0
(Boiler and heat pump)
OFF
(No synchronize,
Always ON)
ON
(Installed)
1
(Boiler only)
2
(Heater only)
3
(Boiler only(P1 OFF))
ON
(Using)
ON / ON / ON
OFF / ON / ON
0
(Boiler and heat pump)
ON
(Synchronize)
1
(Boiler only)
2
(Heater only)
3
(Boiler only(P1 OFF))
41
ON / ON / ON
OFF / OFF / OFF
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
Default
Variable range
23
Boiler-heat pump switching temperature
-10 °C
-20-20 °C
3E
Control priority between the hydro unit and boiler
(Control valid for operating heat pump mode)
0: Hydro unit control
Independent temperature
control for the hydro unit
and boiler
5B
Coordination of the boiler and heat pump
3: Boiler only (Pump OFF) 0: Boiler and Heat pump
1: Boiler only
2: Heater only
62
Activate/deactivate A02 error detection
0: Activate
1: Deactivate
8) Hot water boost operation
A Hot water boost operation heats the water quickly to the set temperature TSC_H = 75 °C (FC_09).
1) How to operate
] button, a heat pump operation
• When pressing the [Hot water boost] button after pressing the remote controller [
in progress in the heating side switches to in the hot water side, and continues the operation regardless of the hot
water supply start condition, TTW < 38 °C. In addition, the hot water cylinder is immediately energized to start a Hot
water supply operation under TSC_H = 75 °C.
• A Hot water boost operation returns to the usual operation after 60 minutes passed or reached 75 °C.
• The remote controller display during a Hot water boost operation is the same as the set temperature display of a
usual Hot water supply operation.
• The usual set temperature change is used for changing the set temperature during a Hot water boost operation.
Change the BOOST set temperature with FC_09, if necessary.
HOT WATER button set to "ON"
Hot water boost button set to "ON"
Heating side
Current heat pump
operation
Switches to Hot water
Hot water
supply operation
supply side
75 °C hot water operation (FC_09)
60 minutes operating time (FC_08)
Usual operation
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
Default
Setting available range
09
Hot water boost set temperature
75 °C
40-80 °C
08
Hot water boost operation time
60 min
30-180 min
Every 10 min
42
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
9) Anti bacteria operation
An Anti bacteria operation regularly performs a Hot water supply operation with the set temperature TSC_H = 75 °C
(can be set with FC_0A).
1) How to operate
] button and then the remote controller [Anti bacteria] button changes the setting to TSC_H = 75
• Pressing the [
°C at the set cycle and time (both can be set with the remote controller FC) to start Anti bacteria operation.
• The first Anti bacteria operation starts when press the [Anti bacteria] button and starting time come.
• When the set temperature 75 °C is reached after the Anti bacteria operation started, the set temperature remains
another 30 minutes (can be set with FC_0B).
• The priority zone determined by the outside temperature selects an operation, Hot water heat pump or hot water
supply heater.
• The hot water heat pump operation, when selected, ignores the hot water supply start condition (TTW < 38 °C) and
forcibly performs a hot water operation.
• During Anti bacteria operation (Forcible hot water operation at 75 °C), the hot water set temperature display is not
changed. If it is changed from the remote controller, the normal hot water set temperature will be changed.
HOT WATER button set to "ON"
Anti bacteria button set to "ON"
Anti bacteria start time
75 °C hot water supply operation
75 °C hot water supply operation for 30 minutes
Usual hot water supply operation
(Set temperature: 40 °C to 75 °C)
Caution
• During a 75 °C hot water supply operation with Anti bacteria,
the remote controller does not display 75 °C.
• Be careful not to burn yourself; Output water may be hotter
than that displayed on the remote controller.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
Default
Setting available range
0A
Anti bacteria set temperature
75 °C
65-80 °C
0B
Anti bacteria holding time
30 min
0 - 60 min
Remote
controller 0C
Anti bacteria start time
22:00
0:00-22:00
Remote
controller 0D
Anti bacteria operation cycle
7 days
Every day to 10 days
43
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
10) Night setback operation
A Night setback operation performs heating at 5K lower and cooling at 5K higher temperatures against the remote
controller set temperature from the setting start time (22:00) to the end time (6:00) every day.
Note) • Set the remote controller time before starting a Night setback operation.
• The set time can be changed with remote controller FC. (See 10-8 (See page 122))
Related FC
Default
Setting available range
Remote controller Night setback start Time setting
OE
FC No.
Setting item
22:00
0:00-23:00
Remote controller Night setback end Time setting
OF
6:00
0:00-23:00
26
Night setback setting Temperature width
58
Night setback setting activate
5 degree
3 -20 degree
0. Zone 1 & 2
1. Zone 1 only
11) Frost protection operation
A Frost protection operation performs heating at the set temperature RSC_F = 15 °C (FC).
1) How to operate
• Pressing the remote controller [
] button and then the [Frost protection] button starts a heating operation at the
set temperature of 15 °C.
• Pressing again the [Frost protection] button cancels the Frost protection operation.
• The remote controller displays "F" as the temperature during Frost protection.
• A set temperature change during a Frost protection operation cancels the operation.
2) Automatic stop of Frost protection operation
• The operation period of Frost protection can be set at FC 12 and 13 on the remote controller.
Longest period available: 20 days and 23 hours
• By entering the operation period (day and hour) at FC 12 and 13 on the remote controller and pressing the [Frost
protection] button, the operation period is set and the Frost protection operation will automatically be finished after
the period has passed.
• The operation period setting (day and hour) is stored in the memory.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
Default
Setting available range
3A
Frost protection Yes / No
1: Yes
0: No
3B
Frost protection Set temperature
15 °C
10-20 °C
12 (Remote controller) FROST running period (days)
0
0-20 days
13 (Remote controller) FROST running period (hours)
0
0-23hours
44
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
12) Auto operation
An Auto operation sets the water temperature TSC_F depending on the outside air temperature TO.
1) How to operate
] button and then setting Auto mode "ON" starts Auto operation for heating.
• Pressing the remote controller [
• During an Auto operation, setting Auto mode "OFF" returns to the usual manual set heating operation.
• The remote controller displays "A" as the temperature during an Auto operation.
(When 2-temperature control is enabled, the remote controller displays "A".)
] button in menu display activates the Auto-Curve FC change mode, enabling the set Auto• Long-pressing the [
Curve water temperature to be shifted by ±5K range (FC_27). When using the auto curve shift function please note
the maximum and minimum water temperature at 60 °C and 20 °C respectively.
• Even if the temperature setting is changed during an Auto operation, the operation continues.
• An Auto operation works with a heating operation only, not with a cooling or a hot water supply operation.
<ZONE1>
• An operation starts at the set temperature of straight -line approximation for the following: water temperature A °C
with the outside temperature T0 °C, B °C with T1 °C, C °C with T2 °C, D °C with T3 °C, and E °C with 20 °C.
Related FC
TSC_F (°C)
± 5K adjustable (FC 27)
A(40)
FC No.
B(35)
C(30)
D(25)
E(20)
T0
(-20)
T1
(-10)
T2=0
T3
(10)
20 TO (°C)
Default
range
2C
Setting temperature A at T0
Setting item
40
20~60 °C
2D
Setting temperature B at T1
35
20~60 °C
2E
Setting temperature C at T2 (= 0 °C)
30
20~60°C
2F
Setting temperature D at T3
25
20~60 °C
30
Setting temperature E at 20 °C
20
20~60 °C
A1
Outside temperature T0
-20
-30~-20 °C
29
Outside temperature T1
-10
-15~0 °C
2B
Outside temperature T3
10
0~15 °C
27
Set temperature shift with heating set to auto
0
-5 to 5K
<ZONE2>
• Set temperature of the ZONE2 can be selected from two methods (FC_A2). One is a percentage of ZONE1, the other
is a fixed value.
FC_A2 = "0" : Percentage method that is set by FC_31.
FC_A2 = "1" : Fixed value method that is set by FC_A3, A4 and A5.
However, it is automatically controlled the set temperature of ZONE1 to be the ZONE2 or more.
FC_A2=0 Percentage method
FC_A2=1 Fixed value method
TSC_F(°C)
TSC_F(°C)
ZONE 1
A(40)
A'(40)
ZONE 2
80 % (FC_31) of ZONE1
B(35)
B'(35)
C(30)
D(25)
E'(20)
E(20)
T0
(-20)
T1
(-10)
T2=0
T3
(10)
T0
(-20)
20 TO (°C)
Auto-Curve in ZONE2 shows 80% (FC) of that of ZONE1,
the water temperature setting does not fall below 20 °C.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
A2
The choice of how to set ZONE2
A3
Setting temperature A' at T0
A4
Setting temperature B' at T1
A5
Setting temperature E' at 20 °C
31
Auto-Curve ratio of ZONE2
20 TO (°C)
The ZONE2 set temperature A' °C with the outside
temperature T0 °C, B' °C with T1 °C, E' °C with 20 °C.
Default
0
40
35
20
80
45
T1
(-10)
range
0 or 1
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
0~100%
Item
8-2.
Operation Mode
and Control
Method
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
13) Night time low-noise operation
A night time low-noise operation reduces operation frequency and the number of outdoor fan rotations for a certain period
during night time as noise control for urban operation.
Maximum operation frequency 40.2 Hz (Hot water supply/Heating/Cooling)
Maximum fan tap
500 rpm (P805HR-E, P1105HR-E)
The night time low-noise operation is enabled / disabled by changing the remote controller FC_09.
<How to set> - Refer to “11. Night time Low-noise Setting” on page 139.
Select "Silent mode" in menu display, and set to "ON".
8-3.
1) Capacity control (compressor, high-temperature release, low-temperature release)
Hydro Unit Control
This unit controls the compressor frequency and heater output so that the water outlet temperature matches the remote
controller set temperature.
1-1) Compressor control
• Calculates the different between the remote controller set temperature (TSC_H, TSC_F) and the water outlet
temperature (Hot water supply: THO, Heating: TWO).
• Sets the Hz signal correction amount that determines the number of compressor rotations by the temperature
difference.
• Detects the number of compressor rotations.
• Compares the Hz signal correction amount and the current operation Hz, and changes the compressor output
according to the difference.
* The control details are the same for hot water supply, heating, and cooling.
Remote controller
Temperature settings
(TSC_H, TSC_F)
Hydro unit
Water outlet temperature
(THO, TWO)
TSC_H-THO for hot water supply
TSC_F-TWO
for heating/cooling
Hz signal correction
Number of compressor
rotation detection
Hz signal correction ≤ Operation Hz
Inverter output change
Number of compressor
rotation change
Compressor frequency changeable range 10 Hz to 70 Hz (P805HR-E)
10 Hz to 90 Hz (P1105HR-E)
46
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
1-2) Low temperature release control
Hydro Unit Control
A heat pump operation is performed as shown in the table below according to the TC sensor detecting temperature.
• For the detected temperature, TC = TWO of a heat pump operation is used. The values of T7 through T10 varies
depending on TWI. (See the table below)
• If the compressor frequency instruction from the hydro unit is less then 10 Hz, the compressor stops.
• TC < 3 °C causes the compressor to stop abnormally. When the compressor restarts when 140 seconds has
passed after the stop and TC < 3 °C is not detected for 20 minutes, the abnormal stop counter is cleared. 10 times
of compressor abnormal stop stops the operation of heat pump, and fault code A11 is displayed on the remote
controller.
* If the heat pump operation is switched to other operation, the abnormality detection counter is reset to 0.
Zone
Control operation
S (normal)
R1
Increase compressor frequency by 0.8 Hz every
60 sec.
R2 (slow up)
R2
Q (keep)
Increase compressor frequency by 0.4 Hz every
60 sec.
O
Decrease compressor frequency by 4.5 Hz every
10 sec.
P
Decrease compressor frequency by 2.4 Hz every
10 sec.
Q
Keep compressor frequency.
TC (TWO)
T7
T8
R1
(slow up)
T9
P (slow down)
T10
O (down)
T11
Forcible stop
TC=TWO
(°C)
TWI
T7
T8
T9
T10
TWI<10
8.0
6.0
4.0
3.0
T11
2.5
10 ≤ TWI<15
8.5
6.5
4.5
3.4
2.5
15 ≤ TWI<20
9.0
7.0
5.0
4.0
2.5
20 ≤ TWI
9.5
7.5
5.5
4.5
2.5
1-3) Freeze release control (TC+TWO release control)
For freeze prevention, the compressor is controlled during cooling operation as shown in the table below according
to the calculated values of TC and TWO.
• If TC + TWO falls below -15 for a total of 10 times, the compressor stops abnormally and fault code A10 is displayed
on the remote controller.
• When cooling operation has lasted normally for 10 minutes, the abnormality detection counter is reset to 0.
TC+TWO
S : Normal
T7
P : Down
T8
Forced stop
T7
T8
T9
6.0
4.0
-15
47
Control operation
Normal cooling operation
P (slowdown)
Decrease compressor frequency by approx.
2.0 Hz every 10 sec.
O (down)
Decrease compressor frequency by approx.
4.0 Hz every 10 sec.
(Forced stop)
Stop the compressor.
O : Down
T9
TC+TWO
Zone
S (normal)
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
2) Heater control
Hydro Unit Control 2-1) Hot water supply operation
During a hot water heat pump operation, the unit energizes the hot water cylinder heater (2.7 kW) when all the
following conditions are met. Note that when the hot water supply set temperature (TSC_F) is reached, the unit stops
energizing the heater.
• When 30 minutes has passed after the hot water heat pump operation started.
• The water inlet temperature (TWI) reaches 50 °C.
• The hot water cylinder sensor reaches the HP_OFF temperature (45 °C-FC).
• The HP_ON temperature (38 °C-FC) is reached without the hot water HP status.
• Hot water boost operation is in progress.
TTW
85
TSC_H
Abnormality detection (A03 displayed)
Z zone
Y zone
Heater off
Diff : 2K
X zone
Heater on
TSC_H-4
Hot water boost
Heater on only with
Hot water boost in operation
Heat pump_OFF(45)
(Heater on without
hot water heat
pump)
Heat pump_ON (38 °C)
(Hot water heat pump)
2-2) Heating operation
1) Heater control at the time of heat pump operation
• Object to be controlled: Backup heater
The backup heater control starts when 13 minutes has passed after the heating heat pump operation started and
select the ZONE (A-D). The backup heater control increases, decreases, or maintains the number of heaters
every 10 minutes (FC) depending on the difference between the heating set temperature (TSC_F) and the heater
outlet temperature (THO). When the heating set temperature (TSC_F) is reached, the hydro stops energizing
the backup heater.
THO
70
E zone
Abnormality detection (A02 displayed)
Diff : 2K
D zone
TSC_F-0
(+2)
*1
TSC_F-2
Heater output down every
5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes
C zone
Diff : 2K
B zone
KEEP
TSC_F-4
Diff : 2K
A zone
Status
*1 HWS-P805 only
Heater off
Heater output up every
10, 20, 30, or 40 minutes
Heater ON/OFF
Heater 1
Backup-heater 3 kW = ON
Heater 2
Backup-heater 9 kW = ON
(1) HWS-**M3-E model has the backup heater 1 of 3 kW only.
(2) HWS-**T6-E model has the backup heater 2 of 3 kW. (Total 6 kW)
• Restriction of backup heater energization during heating mode (For energy saving)
When outdoor temperature is higher than the reference valve, the backup heater is forcibly off during heating mode.
Related FC
FC No.
B8
Setting item
Forcibly heater off
at TO ≥ A °C
Default
Setting available range
no restriction
-5 ~ 20 °C
48
Item
8-3.
Hydro Unit Control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
2) Control at the time of heating heater operation
• Controlled Object: Backup heater, Booster heater
The backup heater control starts when 13 minutes has passed after the heating heat pump operation started.
The backup heater control increases, decreases, or maintains the number of heaters every 10 minutes (FC)
depending on the difference between the heating set temperature (TSC_F) and the heater outlet temperature
(THO). Note that when the heating set temperature (TSC_F) is reached, the unit stops energizing the heater.
THO
70
E zone
Abnormality detection
Diff : 2K
D zone
Heater off
TSC_F+2
Heater output down every
5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes
C zone
TSC_F-0
Diff : 2K
B zone
KEEP
TSC_F-2
Diff : 2K
A zone
Status
Heater output up every
10, 20, 30, or 40 minutes
Heater ON/OFF
Heater 1
Backup heater 3 kW = ON
Heater 2
Backup heater 9 kW = ON
Heater 3
Heater 2 + Booster heater
HWS-**M3-E model has the backup heater 1 of 3 kW only.
HWS-**T6-E model has the backup heater 2 of 3 kW. (Total 6 kW)
Booster heater operation come only output signal. (Booster heater activate under heater only mode)
Related FC
FC No.
Default
Setting available range
20
Hot water supply heat pump start temperature
Setting item
38 °C
20-45 °C
21
Hot water supply heat pump stop temperature
45 °C
40-50 °C
33
Heater control of down time
1:10 min
0:5 min 2:15 min 3:20 min
34
Heater control of up time
0:10 min
1:20 min 2:30 min 3: 40 min
2-3) Heater control at the time of defrosting
• Object to be controlled: Backup heater
When a defrosting operation starts during the heating heat
pump operation, the unit energizes a backup heater (3 kW)
according to the heater outlet temperature sensor (THO) and
the set temperature (TSC_F) as shown in Figure.
1) When the heater outlet temperature sensor (THO) drops to
the temperature of 2 °C below the TSC_F-β, the backup
heater is energized.
β can be changed for energy saving.
THO
TSC_F - β
Heater OFF
diff: 2K
Heater ON
Status
Heater 1
Heater ON/OFF
Backup heater 3 kW = ON
Defrosting ends according to the usual heater control.
Related FC
FC No.
B9
Setting item
β : 0 = 0K, ..., 4 = 40K
Recommendation : β = 2(20K)
Default
Setting available range
0K
0K - 40K
2-4) Forcible heater energization
To prevent freeze, the unit energizes or stops energizing a backup heater (3 kW) regardless of the unit status, not
operated or in operation.
• Object to be controlled: Backup heater
1) Energization start condition: TWO < 4 or TWI < 4 or THO < 4
2) Energization stop condition: TWO ≥ 5 and TWI ≥ 5 and THO ≥ 5
Defrosting ends according to the usual heater control.
49
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
2-5) No heater operation
Hydro Unit Control
According to the DP_SW11 setting, the unit switches the energize / not energize for the hot water cylinder, backup
heater, and booster. For details, see 10-1. (See page 117)
(Caution)
All heater should be added to this Air to water system.
The system has been designed to operate with all electrical heaters energized.
3) Circulation pump control
One circulation pump (external circulation pump P2) can be connected to the unit in addition to the built-in
circulation pump P1.
You can change the settings of the built-in pump P1 and the external circulation pump P2 using
DP_SW10-1, 2, and 3 in the hydro unit.
Item
Circulation
pump
DPSW10
Operation
01: Built-in circulation pump P1’s action during hot water supply operation:
HP operation only / Always energized
02: Built-in circulation pump P1’s action during heating operation:
Always energized / Turned off when TO sensor detect over than 20 °C.
03: External circulation pump P2’s action:
Non-synchronous / Synchronous with the built-in circulation pump P1
04: Built-in circulation pump P1 ON/OFF cycling (During long periods of
system off)
Initial value
OFF: HP operation
only
OFF: Always
energized
OFF: Nonsynchronous*2
OFF: None
DPSW
SW10-1
SW10-2
SW10-3
SW10-4
If the external circulation pump P2 is set to Non-synchronous, the pump P2 is always energized.
3-1) Controlling the built-in circulation pump P1
Pump type: DC motor, rated voltage 220-230 V, 6 speed (changed manually)
The pump operation starts under the condition below:
] or [
] button is pressed.
• When the [
The pump operation stops under the condition below:
] button is pressed.
• When the [
] or [
(Operation will stop fully in about 1 minute.)
FC_code A0
0 (Default)
1
2
3
4
5
Pump flow rate
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
The pump operation stops/restarts under the conditions shown below.
• When changing operation modes, the pump stops for 30 seconds.
Boiler is installed or not
(DPSW13_2)
Boiler position
(DPSW02_1)
OFF
(Not installed)
OFF (After 3-way valve, heating side)
ON (Before 3-way valve)
OFF (After 3-way valve, heating side)
ON (Before 3-way valve)
ON
(Installed)
P1 pump control
Stop/restart temperatures
(TWI or TWO or THO)
70 °C / 68 °C
70 °C / 68 °C
70 °C / 68 °C
58 °C / 55 °C
3-2) Controlling the built-in circulation pump P1 during the hot water supply operation
You can change the action of the built-in circulation pump P1 during the hot water supply operation using DP_SW10-1.
• DP_SW10-1 OFF (Default): The pump stops as the HP for hot water supply stops.
• DP_SW10-1 ON: The pump is always energized.
3-3) Controlling the built-in circulation pump P1 during the heating operation
You can change the action of the built-in circulation pump P1 during the heating operation using DP_SW10-2.
• DP_SW10-2 OFF (Default): The pump is always energized.
• DP_SW10-2 ON : The pump stops when To ≥ 20 °C. (Practically the HP for heating is turned off.)
3-4) Synchronized external circulation pump P2
Pump type: DC motor, rated voltage 220-230 V, connectable directly up to 200W rated power output.
You can select whether the pump P2 is synchronized with the pump P1 using DP_SW10-3. The pump P2 is always
energized if the pump P2 is not synchronized.
• DP_SW10-3 OFF (Default): Non-synchronous
NOTE:
2 zone temperature control by boiler with P1 OFF is required DP_SW10-3 OFF
3-5) Controlling the external circulation pump P2
You can change the action of the external circulation pump P2 during cooling operation by setting FC64.
• FC64=”00”(Default): The pump is always energized.
• FC64=”01” : The pump is always stopped.
50
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
3-6) Controlling the built-in circulation pump P1 during cooling operation controlled with the room temperature thermostat
Hydro Unit Control
or room temperature remote controller.
You can change the action of the built-in circulation pump P1 by setting FC65.
• FC65=”00”(Default): The pump is always energized.
• FC65=”01” : The pump is stopped when the thermostat is turned off.
3-7) Interval operation of the pump P1 during thermostat off operation (For energy saving)
The pump of the hydro unit performs intermittent operation according to the outdoor temperature during thermostat
off (compressor off) operation.
NOTE:
When boiler is installed (DPSW13_2 : ON), do NOT set intermittent operation or do NOT set the valve of A
(FC_BA) lower than the Boiler-heat pump switching temperature (FC_23).
A, lower limit of To during the heating operation, must be higher than the Boiler-heat pump switching
temperature.
Because when To is lower than the Boiler-heat pump switching temperature, the boiler output is ON state. But
if the pump stops due to the intermittent operation, the boiler output is also turned OFF.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
5A
Control of the pump P1 during the hot water supply operation
64
Control of the pump P2 during in cooling operation
Control of the pump P1 while using the room temperature control
or room temperature thermostat
Turn off the P1 when TO sensor detect over than this temperature
Pump P1 restart diff TO sensor temperature, when turn off the P1
by to sensor detection.
intermittent operation at TO ≥ A °C (heating)
intermittent operation at TO < B °C (cooling)
65
9E
6E
BA
BB
51
Default
0: synchronized with
HP
0: Always ON
0: 20 °C
Setting value
1: Always energized
Equal to DPSW10-1
1: Always stopped
1: Stopped when the
thermostat is OFF
10~30 °C
2: 2K
1~5K
0: Always ON
0: continuous operation -5 ~ 20 °C
0: continuous operation 25 ~ 35 °C
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
4) Control by the flow switch
Hydro Unit Control Whether water flows or not is judged with the ON/OFF of the flow switch.
Model
Determined that water flows when:
Determined that water does not flow when:
HWS-P805**-E
13L or more water flows per minute
Water less than 13L flows per minute
HWS-P1105**-E
18L or more water flows per minute
Water less than 18L flows per minute
Without water-flow determination from the flow switch after the hot water supply operation, heating operation, or cooling
operation, The HP, backup heater and booster heater are not energized. Similarly, The “A01” error indication flashes if
the flow switch judged that water does not flow.
The specification of the flow switch is the same in P805**-E and P1105**-E. The flow setting differs due to the
specification of piping in the hydro unit.
5) Mixing Valve control (2-temperature heating control)
To set different radiator unit supply temperatures or floor heating supply temperatures, the unit performs Mixing Valve
control.
When Mixing Valve "Yes" is selected, the unit controls Mixing Valve every 4 minutes (FC) based on the difference TSC_Δ
T between the Zone2 set temperature and TFI (floor inlet water temperature sensor) temperature as follows:
TSC_ΔT
2 ≤ TSC_ΔT
-2 ≤ TSC_ΔT < 2
-2 > TSC_ΔT
Control value
+ 1 step (Open)
± 0 step
- 1 step (Close)
Initial value
Driving range
1 step
Control cycle
6
0-12
3 WV move 7.5 degrees
4 min (FC)
To enable 2 zone temperature control switch DP_SW12-3 to ON.
NOTE:
The mixing valve will automatically be reset if 24 hours pass with the valve fully closed.
2 zone temperature control by boiler with P1 OFF is required DP_SW10-3 OFF.
Related FC
FC No.
Default
Setting available range
0C
Mixing Valve operation time
Setting item
60
30 - 240 sec
59
Mixing Valve control time
4
1 - 30 min
6) Room temperature control
You can install a sub remote controller (separately purchased) in a room to control room temperature.
6-1) Installing the sub remote controller
• Wiring with the main unit (See the figure on the right) : After detaching the front
panel, connect the sub remote controller to the right terminal on the main remote
controller, which is connected with the hydro unit. (No polarity)
• Place to install (inside a room): At the height of 100 cm-150 cm on a wall
Opposite to the radiator or fan coil installed
No assignment when floor heating is used on the room.
Right terminal on the
main remote controller
6-2) Room temperature control settings
• Function code setting:FC_40="1"
• Setting of the remote controller Temperature control “ON”.
(Setting → Initial setting → Temperature control)
52
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
6-3) Control method
Hydro Unit Control
• The water temperature setting at starting operation is 40 °C (FC_9D) at heating and 20 °C (FC_96) at cooling.
If the temperature setting calculated by Auto curve at starting operation will be used instead of the fixed
temperature 40 °C (FC_9D), FC_B5 should be set to “1”.
• The target water outlet temperature is adjusted by 1deg every 30 minutes based on the TSC_rc, the temperature
setting on the remote controller, and the room temperature (temperature indicated on the remote controller: T_rc).
The adjustable range of water temperature is set with FC18-1B.
• The temperature set on the remote controller and actual room temperature may differ depending on the place of
the remote controller or room space. In that case, adjust temperature detection using FC02 (for heating) and FC03
(for cooling) on the remote controller.
Warm-mode
A’ zone:Thermo off
Cool-mode
TSC_rc+2K
TSC_rc+1K
TSC_rc
TSC_rc-0.5K
TSC_rc+0.5K
A zone:Thermo off
D zone:Down water temp
TSC_rc
B zone:Down water temp
C zone:Keep water temp
TSC_rc+0K
C zone:Keep water temp
TSC_rc-1.0K
D zone:Up water temp
B zone:Up water temp
A zone:Thermo off
How to shift up/down the temperature by remote controller FC02, 03
• Ambient temperature (remote controller) is higher than room temperature: example. 1deg
Change remote controller FC02, 03 = “-1K” to “-2K”
• Ambient temperature (remote controller) is lower than room temperature: example. 1deg
Change remote controller FC02, 03 = “-1K” to “0”
T_rc
D zone
C zone
B zone
A zone
A’ zone
Correction control
Heating
Setting is corrected upward
Water temperature setting is up by 1deg every 30
minutes.
No correction
Setting is corrected downward.
Water temperature setting is down by 1deg every 30
minutes.
Thermo off. But if inlet water detect less 25 °C, then
heat pump restart.
Setting is corrected downward.
Water temperature setting is down by 1deg every 39
minutes.
Thermo off
Cooling
Setting is corrected upward
Water temperature setting is down by 1deg every 30
minutes.
No correction
Setting is corrected downward.
Water temperature setting is down by 1deg every 30
minutes.
Thermo off
Related FC
FC No.
18
19
1A
1B
40
Setting item
Upper limit of cooling temperature setting
Lower limit of cooling temperature setting
Upper limit of heating temperature setting (Zone 1)
Lower limit of heating temperature setting (Zone 1)
Room temperature control
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
96
cooling by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
9D
heating by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat
02 (Remote controller) Room temperature correction (at heating)
03 (Remote controller) Room temperature correction (at cooling)
B2
Heat pump restart water condition in A zone.
Choose of the initial setting temperature.
Either use the temperature set in FC_9D, or use the
B5
temperature calculated by Auto curve.
This applies heating operation only.
53
Default
25
7
60
20
0
Variable range
18-25 °C
7-18 °C
37-60 °C
20-37 °C
0:Not permitted 1:Permitted
20
10-25 °C
40
20-60 °C
-1
-1
25
-10K - +10K, 1K step
-10K - +10K, 1K step
20-37 °C
0 : Use the temperature
set in FC_9D
1 : Use the temperature
calculated by Auto curve
0
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
7) Room temperature control with the thermostat
Hydro Unit Control You can install a commercially available thermostat to control room temperature.
7-1) Installing the room temperature thermostat
• TCB-PCM03E optional PC board is required. Connect its connection cable to CN211 port on the PC board of the
hydro unit.
• Wiring to the main unit: connect the optional PC board TCB-PCM03E to the hydro unit after detaching the front
panel.
Thermostat for heating : Connect TCB-PCM03E between the terminals (1) and (3).
Thermostat for cooling : Connect TCB-PCM03E between the terminals (2) and (3).
• Place to install (inside a room): At the height of 120 cm-180 cm on a wall
Opposite to the radiator or fan coil installed
No assignment when floor heating is used on the room.
7-2) Room temperature thermostat control setting
• Setting of DPSW on the hydro unit
DP_SW02_4=“ON” (Default “OFF”)
TCB-PCMO3E
PJ17
CN210
Red
CN211
Black
Terminal label
7-3)Heating thermostat operation
When the heating thermostat does not reach the assigned temperature (the circuit between (1) and (3) is closed),
heating starts under the setting that water temperature for heating is 40 °C (FC_9D). If the heating thermostat has not
reached the assigned temperature 30 minutes after heating had started, the water temperature setting is turned up 1
degree, and the same action will be repeated every 30 minutes until the thermostat reaches the assigned temperature.
The backup heater and booster heater are controlled in the same way as in the normal HP operation.
When the heating thermostat reaches the assigned temperature (the circuit between (1) and (3) is open), the heat
pump shifts to the “thermostat off” operation. During the operation, the water temperature setting is turned down by 1
degree every 30 minutes. The backup heater and booster heater are tuned off as the heat pump shifts to the
“thermostat off” operation.
7-4)Cooling thermostat operation
When the cooling thermostat does not reach the assigned temperature (the circuit between (2) and (3) is open),
cooling starts under the setting that water temperature fro cooling is 20 °C (FC_96). If the cooling thermostat has not
reached the assigned temperature 30 minutes after cooling had started, the water temperature setting is turned down
1 degree, and the same action will be repeated every 30 minutes until the thermostat reaches the assigned
temperature.
When the cooling thermostat reaches the assigned temperature (the circuit between (2) and (3) is closed), operation
shifts to the “thermostat off” operation. During the operation, the water temperature setting is turned up by 1 degree
every 30 minutes.
Room thermostat
Correction control
Heating operation
Cooling operation
CLOSE
Setting is corrected
upward
Thermo on
Thermo off
The water temperature setting is turned The water temperature setting is turned
up by 1 degree every 30 minutes.
up by 1 degree every 30 minutes.
OPEN
Setting is corrected
downward.
Thermo off
Thermo on
The water temperature setting is turned The water temperature setting is turned
down by 1 degree every 30 minutes.
down by 1 degree every 30 minutes.
Related FC
FC No.
9D
96
B5
Setting item
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
heating by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat.
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
cooling by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat.
Choose of the initial setting temperature.
Either use the temperature set in FC_9D, or use the
temperature calculated by Auto curve.
This applies heating operation only.
54
Default
Variable range
40
20-60 °C
20
10-25 °C
0
0 : Use the temperature
set in FC_9D
1 : Use the temperature
calculated by Auto curve
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
8) Hot water cylinder thermostat control
Hydro Unit Control
Hot water can be supplied using an existing hot-water cylinder with a thermostat.
8-1) Installing the hot-water cylinder thermostat
• Optional board : TCB-PCM03E optional PC board is required. Connect its connection cable to CN210 port on the
PC board of the hydro unit.
• Wiring with the main unit : After detaching the front panel, install TCB-PCM03E optional PC board in the hydro unit.
Hot-water cylinder heating thermostat : Connect this thermostat between (1) and (2) on TCB-PCM03E.
• Place to install the thermostat (hot-water cylinder) : At a height of 30 to 50 cm from the base.
• Hot-water heater : A hot-water heater is required. (Without a hot-water heater, the hydro unit will not work.)
8-2) Setting the hot-water cylinder thermostat
Setting of DPSW on the hydro unit : DP_SW02_3 = “ON” (Default “OFF”)
TCB-PCMO3E
PJ17
CN210
Red
CN211
Black
Terminal label
8-3) Hot-water thermostat operation (hot-water supply operation only)
If hot water is used when the hot-water thermostat is at the assigned temperature (the circuit between (1) and (2) is
open), the hot-water heat pump starts with the hot-water thermostat closed.
After 30 minutes, the hot-water cylinder heater turns on, but the hot-water heat pump continues running until the hotwater cylinder thermostat becomes open.
It should be noted, however, that the hot-water heat pump might stop if the water input temperature becomes high.
8-4) Hot-water thermostat operation (hot-water supply + heating operation)
If hot water is used when the hot-water thermostat is at the assigned temperature (the circuit between (1) and (2) is
open), the hot-water heat pump starts with the hot-water thermostat closed.
In 30 minutes, the hot-water heat pump stops. After that, only the hot-water cylinder heater is used to raise water
temperature.
The heat pump switches to heating operation. Unless the hot-water cylinder thermostat temperature rises, the hotwater heat pump will never take over.
8-5) Hot-water thermostat operation (hot-water supply + cooling operation)
For automatic switching to hot-water supply plus cooling operation, FC-0F is required.
If hot water is used when the hot-water thermostat is at the assigned temperature (the circuit between (1) and (2) is
open), the hot-water heat pump starts with the hot-water thermostat closed.
In 30 minutes, the hot-water heat pump stops. After that, only the hot-water cylinder heater is used to raise water
temperature.
The heat pump switches to cooling operation. Unless the hot-water cylinder thermostat temperature rises, the hotwater heat pump will never take over.
Related FC
FC No.
0F
Setting item
Hot water HP allowance while cooling + hot water
supply
55
Default
Setting value
0:Not allow
1:Allow
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
9) Control of force stop and restart
Hydro Unit Control
The unit can be stopped and restarted with external input. By setting FC52, FC61 and FCB6, you can set an operation
mode to run/stop or can run/stop the unit in the mode assigned on the remote controller.
• TCB-PCM03E optional PC board is required.
Connect its connection cable to CN210 port
on the PC board of the hydro unit.
TCB-PCMO3E
PJ17
CN210
Red
CN211
Black
Terminal label
9-1)Setting the control method
Select a control method by setting FC52.
• FC52=“0”:Stops ESTIA as the circuit between the terminals (1) and (3) is closed. (Default)
• FC52=“1”:Stops ESTIA as the circuit between the terminals (1) and (3) is opened.
• FC52=“2”: Starts ESTIA as the circuit between the terminals (1) and (3) is closed.
Stops ESTIA as the circuit between the terminals (1) and (3) is opened.
• FC52=“3”:Starts/Stops ESTIA as the circuit between the terminals (1) and (3) is received closed plus.
9-2)Setting the object to control
Select an operation mode by setting FC61.
• FC61=“0”:Hot water supply and heating (Default)
• FC61=“1”:Follows the setting on the remote controller (If the hot water supply operation, heating operation, or hot
water supply + heating operation is started manually after the unit was stopped with an external input, the new
status is reflected to the setting on the remote controller.)
• FC61=“2”:Hot water supply only
• FC61=“3”:Heating only
It is possible to control each of the heating and hot water supply with the following settings:
• FCB6=“1” (Default “0”) and FC61=“3” and DP_SW02_3=“OFF” (Default “OFF”)
The terminals (1) and (3) is the heating control.
The terminals (2) and (3) is the hot water supply control.
Both of control method is selected by FC52.
9-3)Cautions
The circuit between the external input terminals (1) and (3) is also used to control the limit of heat pump operation.
You cannot use the forced stop control when the circuit is configured to control the limit of heat pump operation. (See
page 58)
9-4)Setting example
• When you want to turn on/off the unit with static external input reflecting the operation setting on the remote controller
(hot water supply, heating, or hot water supply and heating).
FC52=“2”, FC61=“1”
RC on condition
RC off condition
FC61=1 & FC52=2
Operation pattern
Heating
×
Hot water
×
×
Operation
status 1
↓
Operation
status 2
Heating
Hot water
×
×
×
×
↓
Operation
status 3
Operation
status 4
Heating
Hot water
Heating
Hot water
open signal input
×
×
×
×
×
↓
open signal input
×
×
56
×
×
Manually ON/OFF change by
remote controller
×
×
close signal input
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
close signal input
Item
8-3.
Hydro Unit Control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
Basic operation logic
There are 4 operation combination pattern for Heating & Hot water
When open signal is input, the operation status change to the next status.
For example, if current operation status is heating ON and hot water OFF, then next status to be heating OFF &
hot water OFF when pulse is input Hydro unit memorize the status of the operation pattern before changing OFF
status by close signal.
If pulse is input at operation status 2, the operation pattern in the status 3 is same pattern in the status 1.
Manually ON/OFF
If customer change operation pattern manually by remote controller, change then operation pattern will not be
same as the basic logic.
1. If customer stop operation (Heating off and hot water off) by the controller, then both heating& hot water
are not to be ON with close or open signal.
2. If the unit is stopped (Heating off and hot water off) by open signal, operation pattern will be referred to
the pattern before the unit OFF by close signal.
• When you want to turn on/off with the pulse input reflecting the operation setting on the remote controller (hot water
supply, heating, or hot water supply and heating).
FC52=“3”, FC61=“1”
RC on condition
RC off condition
FC61=1 & FC52=3
Operation pattern
Heating
×
Hot water
×
×
Operation
status 1
Operation
status 2
Heating
Hot water
×
×
↓
Pulse input
×
×
×
×
↓
Pulse input
×
×
Manually ON/OFF
change by remote
controller
Pulse input
Operation
status 3
Operation
status 4
×
Heating
Hot water
Heating
Hot water
×
×
×
↓
Pulse input
×
×
×
×
×
×
There are 4 operation combination pattern for Heating & Hot water
When pulse signal is input, the operation status change to the next status.
For example, if current operation status is heating ON and hot water OFF, then next status to be heating OFF &
hot water OFF when pulse is input Hydro unit memorize the status of the operation pattern before changing OFF
status by pulse signal.
If pulse is input at operation status 2, the operation pattern in the status 3 is same pattern in the status 1.
If customer change operation pattern manually by remote controller, then operation pattern will not be same as the
basic logic.
1. If customer stop operation (Heating off and hot water off) by the controller, then both heating& hot water
to be ON with pulse input.
2. If the unit is stopped (Heating off and hot water off) by pulse input, operation pattern will be referred to
the pattern before the unit OFF by pulse.
Related FC
FC No.
Default
Setting value
52
Control method
Setting item
0
See page 121
61
Object to control
0
See page 121
57
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
10) Control of limit of heat pump operation
Hydro Unit Control
When the peak period of electric power charge is set due to the contract or other conditions, you can limit heat pump
operation and give priority to boiler operation using an external input signal. (This control functions only during the
period the signal is input.)
• TCB-PCM03E optional board is required.
Connect its connection cable to CN210 port
on the PC board of the hydro unit.
TCB-PCMO3E
PJ17
CN210
Red
CN211
Black
Terminal label
10-1)Setting the control method
Select an operation mode by setting FC61.
• FC61=“4”:Hot water cylinder heater = OFF, backup heater = OFF (Built-in circulation pump is ON.)
• FC61=“5”:Hot water cylinder heater = OFF, backup heater = OFF, heat pump = OFF, Built-in circulation pump is
stopped.
10-2)Control summary
When the TEMPO signal is input (the circuit is closed), the boiler signal is output regardless the outside temperature
and devices are turned off following the setting on FC61.
1. Basic operation: heating operation using the boiler
2. Switching to hot water supply: the water circuit is switched to the hot water supply side as the unit detect
that TTW is less than 38 °C.
3. Switching to heating: the water circuit is switched to the heating side as the unit detect that TTW is 45 °C
or more, or 30 minutes has passed since operation started. Heating operation continues at least 30
minutes.
4. The LED on the PC board lights up when the input signal is ON.
11)Output signal control 1
(TCB-PCIN3E optional PC board is required. Connect its connection cable to the CN208 terminal on the PC
board in the hydro unit.)
• The circuit between the terminals (1) and (2) gets closed as an error detection signal is output.
• The circuit between the terminals (3) and (4) gets closed as a boiler signal is output.
The LED on the PC board lights up when the signals are output.
12)Output signal control 2
(TCB-PCIN3E optional PC board is required. Connect its connection cable to the CN209 terminal on the PC
board in the hydro unit.)
< FC67=“0”: Default >
• The circuit between the terminals (1) and (2)
is closed during defrosting.
• The circuit between the terminal (3) and (4)
is closed while the compressor is running.
TCB-PCIN3E
< FC67=“1” >
• The circuit between the terminals (1) and (2)
gets closed as an error is detected.
• The circuit between the terminals (3) and (4)
is closed during operation (when the remote
controller is ON)
The LED on the PC board lights up when the
signals are output.
PJ20
Terminal label
CN208
Blue
CN209
Green
Related FC
FC No.
67
Setting item
Changing the condition of optional
output (For the optional PC board
connected to CN209)
Default
0: 1-2 During defrosting
2-4 While compressor is running.
58
Setting value
1: 1-2 As error is detected
2-4 During operation
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
13) Q-H characteristics of hydro unit
Hydro Unit Control
The following shows the Q-H characteristics.
13-1)HWS-P805XWHM3-E, T6-E, T9-E
Hydraulic heat exchanger (8 kW) QH characteristics
Minimum flow rate
10
9
Hydro unit QHCharacteristics (220/230 V)
Out of range
8
Head [m]
7
6
Pump duty
100 %
5
4
3
2
0
Pump duty
80 %
Pump duty
60 %
1
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Flow rate [L/min]
13-2)HWS-P1105XWHM3-E, T6-E, T9-E
Hydraulic heat exchanger (11 kW) QH characteristics
Minimum flow rate
10
Hydro unit QHCharacteristics (220/230 V)
9
8
Out of range
Head [m]
7
Pump duty
100 %
6
5
4
Pump duty
80 %
3
Pump duty
60 %
2
1
0
0
10
20
Flow rate [L/min]
59
30
40
50
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
14) Automatic restart control
Hydro Unit Control
The unit records operation information before a power outage and retrieves the information after the power is
restored to restart automatically the operation with the information.
14-1)Operation during remote controller
• The operation status before a power outage automatically restarts after the power is restored. (The merit functions
are also enabled)
• Approximately 6 hours or more after a power outage
The operation status before a power outage automatically restarts after the power is restored.
But the merit functions (Night setback, Anti bacteria) are disabled.
• The remote controller time displays "00:00". (The merit functions are disabled)
14-2)Operation during forcible automatic operation
A forcible automatic operation is performed when the power is restored after a power outage.
14-3) Operation during defrosting operation
When the power is restored after a power outage, the usual operation restarts.
Note: The operation details recorded before a power outage
Operation mode: Hot water supply, Heating, Cooling, Hot water supply + Heating, Hot water supply + Cooling
Set temperature: Hot water set temperature, Heating set temperature, Cooling set temperature
Merit function:
Hot water supply operation (Anti bacteria)
Heating operation (Night setback)
15) Piping freeze prevention control
This control operates when the power is on regardless the remote controller setting ON or OFF.
To prevent frost bursting of the water piping for hot water supply and heating, the unit flows water with the
circulation pump when the temperature sensor value falls below a certain temperature.
15-1)Piping freeze prevention control 1
1) Start condition: TWO < 4 °C or THWI < 4 °C.or THO < 4 °C
2) End condition: TWO ≥ 5 °C and TWI ≥ 5 °C and THO ≥ 5 °C
3)-1 How to operate (circulation pump)
• When the circulation pump is not in operation, if the sensor detects the freeze prevention control start
temperature, the unit operate the circulation pump.
• During a freeze prevention operation, a heat pump operation does not start.
• When neither [Hot water supply] nor [heating/cooling] is in operation, if the end condition is not met when 3
minutes has passed after an operation starts, the unit performs the operation in 3)-2 to prevent freeze.
3)-2 How to operate (circulation pump + backup heater)
• When neither [Hot water supply] nor [heating/cooling] is in operation, if the end condition is not met when 3
minutes has passed after an operation starts.
• End condition: TWO ≥ 5 °C and TWI ≥ 5 °C and THO ≥ 5 °C
• Heating with the set temperature 55 °C operates.
3)-3 Abnormal stop
• If a freeze prevention operation continues for 30 minutes and does not meet the end condition, the operation
stops as abnormal stop. (Remote controller check code: A05)
15-2)Piping freeze prevention control 2
TC and TWO activates freeze prevention regardless of a heat pump operation mode.
1) Determination condition: TWO>20 °C. 2*TC+TWO<-12 °C is continuously detected for 180 seconds or longer.
Or TWO ≤ 20 °C. TC+TWO<4 °C is continuously detected for 180 seconds or longer.
2) Determination cancellation conditions
• The stop or operation mode is changed by the remote controller
• The mode is defrosting at the time of determination
At the next time of defrosting, the start condition is not met.
• The mode is other than defrosting at the time of determination
After cooling, heating, hot water heat pump restarts, the start condition is not met for 10 minutes.
3) Error display
• If freeze determination cancellation condition is not met, A04 error is displayed.
15-3)Piping freeze prevention control 3
This control applies only when defrosting is in operation.
1) Determination condition: During defrosting, TWI ≤ 15 °C is continuously detected for 30 seconds or longer (After
the stop, the unit restarts.)
2) Determination cancellation condition
• At the next time of defrosting, the start condition is not met.
3) Error display
• If freeze determination cancellation condition is not met, A04 error is displayed.
60
Item
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
8-3.
15-4)Piping freeze prevention control 4
When the value of Ps sensor is low, freeze prevention is activated regardless of a heat pump operation mode.
Hydro Unit Control
1) Determination condition: Low pressure sensor detects PS < 0.2 MPa and 90 seconds passes (defrosting and
cooling) (During a defrosting operation for cooling and heating, or hot water supply)
Low pressure sensor detects PS < 0.2 MPa and 10 minutes passes (heating and hot
water supply operation)
2) Determination cancellation condition
• After a restart, the start condition is not met for 180 minutes.
• At the next time of defrosting, the start condition is not met. (Defrosting operation for heating or hot water supply)
3) Error display
• If freeze determination cancellation condition is not met, A08 error is displayed.
16) High return water protect control
The hydro unit protects against high return water which made by separate boiler system.
TWI, TWO, THO
70
A02 error detect
(Diff : 2K)
Heat pump stop
50
Heat pump normal operation
When A02 error appeared, the built-in circulation pump will stop.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
62
Activate/deactivate A02 error detection
Default
0: Activate
Setting available range
1: Deactivate
This FC62 function is valid when DP_SW13-2 is ON. (See 10.1-1. Setting switch names and positions)
61
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
1) PMV (Pulse motor valve) control
Valve opening is controlled using the expansion valve with a pulse motor according to a heat pump operation status.
• PMV is controlled between 30 and 500 pulses during an operation.
• At the time of a cooling operation, PMV is controlled with the usual target value of 1 to 4 K temperature difference
between TS sensor and TC sensor.
• At the time of a hot water supply or heating operation, PMV is controlled with the usual target value of -1 to 4 K (for
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E) temperature difference between TS sensor and TE sensor.
• For both cooling and heating, if the cycle is overheated, PMV is controlled using the TD sensor. The usual target
value is 91 °C for a cooling operation, and 96 °C for a heating operation.
* A defective sensor may cause liquid back flow or abnormal overheat of the compressor, significantly shortening the
compressor life. If the compressor or other equipment is repaired, first check that the resistance of each sensor or the
refrigerant cycle has no problem, then start the operation.
2) Discharge temperature release control
This control detects an abnormality of the refrigerant cycle or compressor to perform failure prevention.
• This control reduces operation frequency if the PMV control does not lower the outlet temperature or if the outlet
temperature rapidly rises. The frequency control is broken down to the unit of 0.6 Hz to stabilize the cycle.
• If the discharge temperature detects the abnormal stop zone, the compressor stops and then restarts after 150
seconds. The abnormality detection counter is cleared when the operation continues for 10 minutes. If detected 4
times, the error code is displayed and the compressor does not restart.
* An abnormality could occur due to too less refrigerant, PMV defective, or cycle stuck.
• For details about an error displayed, see the check code list.
TD [°C]
111
109
106
Abnormal stop
Frequency normal down
Frequency slow down
Frequency hold
103
96
Frequency slow up
(up to the point instructed)
As instructed
62
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
3) Current release control
The number of compressor rotation is controlled so that current value of the compressor drive circuit does not exceed the
specified value.
• The outdoor unit detects the input current.
• The outside air temperature is detected and used to set the specified value of current.
• The number of compressor rotation instructed by the hydro unit is used to determine whether the current value
exceeds the specified value.
• If exceeds, the number of compressor rotation is reduced to the most approximate number instructed by the hydro
unit within the specified value range.
Outdoor unit current inverter
Main circuit control current
Outside air temperature (TO)
Current release point setting
Operation current ≤ Settings
Yes
No
Compressor operation Hz down
Current degradation
Capacity control continue
Heating, Hot water supply
Outside temperature
TO (degree °C)
Current release value (A)
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
27.5 ≤ TO
15.0
15 ≤ TO < 27.5
20.0 - (To - 15) × 0.4
TO < 15
20.0
Outside temperature
TO (degree °C)
Current release value (A)
Cooling
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
44 ≤ TO
15.0
39 ≤ TO < 44
17.7
10 ≤ TO < 39
20.0
No cooling operation available for TO < 10 °C.
Heating, Hot water supply
Cooling
(A) CT
(A) CT
20.0
17.7
15.0
20.0
15.0
15
10
27.5 TO
63
39 44 TO
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
4) Current releases shift control
During a cooling operation, this control prevents the electronic parts, such as a compressor drive element, and
compressor from failing.
• The current release control value (I) is selected from the following table according to the TO sensor value.
Current release control value (I)
Temperature range
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
50 °C ≤ TO
14.1
45 °C ≤ TO < 50 °C
14.1
39 °C ≤ TO < 45 °C
14.1
TO < 39 °C
14.1
TO error
14.1
5) Outdoor fan control
The outdoor side control part controls the number of fan motor rotations by receiving an operation instruction from the
Hydro side (Hydro unit) control part.
For sensing the true outside temperature, fan is operated without compressor operation.
* Although the fan motor is a DC motor, which has non-step variable numbers of rotations, it is limited to some steps for convenience of
control.
The number of fan tap rotation allocation [rpm]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
Upper
200
240
240
260
320
380
480
500
Lower
0
0
200
280
360
400
500
520
W9
WA
WB
WC
WD
WE
WF
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
Upper
530
610
640
660
720
780
890
Lower
550
630
660
700
740
820
910
5-1) Cooling fan control
• The TL sensor, TO sensor and operation frequency control the outdoor fan. The control is performed by 1 tap of
the DC fan control (14 taps).
• For 60 seconds after the start, the maximum fan tap for each zone that is shown in the following table is fixed. After
that, the fan is controlled according to the TG. (TG: temperature converted from PD)
TG [°C]
WE tap
58
55
38
35
+ 1 tap/20 secs
(Up to the maximum number of rotation for each zone)
Number of rotation hold
- 1 tap/20 secs
(Up to the minimum number of rotation for each zone)
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
Temperature range
Less than 20 Hz
20 Hz or more to less
than 45 Hz
45 Hz or more
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
38 °C ≤ TO
W6
WC
W8
WC
WA
WD
29 °C ≤ TO < 38 °C
W5
WB
W7
WB
W9
WC
15 °C ≤ TO < 29 °C
W4
W8
W6
WA
W8
WC
5 °C ≤ TO < 15 °C
W3
W6
W5
W8
W7
WA
0 °C ≤ TO < 5 °C
W2
W4
W4
W6
W5
W8
-4 °C ≤ TO < 0 °C
W2
W3
W3
W5
W4
W6
TO < -4 °C
W1
W2
W1
W4
W2
W6
TO error
W1
WC
W1
WC
W2
WD
64
Maximum
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
5-2) Hot water supply and heating fan control
1) The TE sensor, TO sensor and operation frequency control the outdoor fan.
(The minimum W1 to the maximum are controlled according to the table below.)
2) For 3 minutes after the start, the maximum fan tap for each zone that is shown in the following table is fixed. After
that, the fan is controlled according to the TE sensor temperature.
3) If TE ≥ 24 °C continues for 5 minutes, the operation stops. No error code is displayed for this; the status is the same as
the usual thermostat off. The operation restarts after 150 seconds. This intermittent running is not abnormal.
NOTE
If the heat-pump was thermo-off, the out-door fan motor (up/down) continue to run 10 min with W3 rotation.
When the water pump of hydro unit turns on, the fan motor will operate sensing value of outside air temperature (TO).
TE [°C]
-2 tap/20 secs (to W1)
Stop time count
24
-2 tap/20 secs (to W1)
21
-1 tap/20 secs (to W1)
18
Number of revolutions hold
15
+ 1 tap/20 secs
(Up to the maximum tap for each zone)
Temperature range
Less than 20 Hz
20 Hz or more to less
than 45 Hz
45 Hz or more
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
30 °C ≤ TO
W4
W4
W6
25 °C ≤ TO < 30 °C
W5
W5
W7
20 °C ≤ TO < 25 °C
W6
W7
W8
10 °C ≤ TO < 20 °C
W7
W8
W9
5 °C ≤ TO < 10 °C
W9
WA
WA
WB
-3 °C ≤ TO < 5 °C
WA
WA
-10 °C ≤ TO < -3 °C
WB
WB
WB
TO < -10 °C
WD
WD
WD
TO abnormal
WD
WD
WD
65
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
6) Defrosting control
6-1) Defrost operation
This control defrosts the outdoor heat exchanger. The temperature sensor (TE sensor) of the outdoor heat exchanger
determines frost formation, and then defrosting is performed in the 4-way valve reverse defrosting method.
1) During a heating operation, defrosting is performed when the TE sensor meets any of the conditions in A through D
zones.
2) During defrosting, when TE sensor maintains 12 °C or higher for 3 seconds or 7 °C ≤ TE < 12 °C for a minute, the
defrosting ends. Also, when defrosting continues for 10 minutes even if the TE sensor temperature is below 7 °C,
the defrosting ends.
3) After the defrosting, stop the compressor for approx. 40 seconds before starting a heating operation.
4) Switching the jumper "J805" and "J806" of the outdoor control board can change the time of d above mentioned.
(Factory default: 150 minutes)
Heating operation starts
TE 0
[°C]
10
15
39
45
55
[d]
[min]
-2
-5
A zone
-10
D zone
B zone
*1 In 10 to 15 minutes after the heating
operation starts, the lowest value of
TE is recorded as TEO, and the
lowest temperature of To as ToO.
-23
C zone
*1
To Normal
A Zone
Maintain " (TEO - TE) - (ToO - To) ≥ 3 °C" for 20 sec
B Zone
Maintain " (TEO - TE) - (ToO - To) ≥ 2 °C" for 20 sec
C Zone
Maintain " TE ≤ -23 °C" for 20 sec
D Zone
Accumulate compressor operation status of TE < -2 °C for 150 min
66
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
Jumper switching
O: Short circuit ×: Open
J805
J806
[d]
O
O
150 min (Factory default)
O
×
90 min
×
O
60 min
×
×
30 min
6-2) Advance defrost operation
When compressor temperature is low, defrosting preliminary operation will be carried out to carry defrosting smoothly in
effect.
1) Start condition of advance defrosting
•TD < 50 ºC and A, B, C or D zone detected.
2) Conditions for changing over from defrosting preliminary operation to defrosting.
• When TD ≥ 50 °C is detected during defrosting preliminary operation.
• When thermostat is turned off during defrosting preliminary operation.
• When defrosting preliminary operation is carried out more than 10 minutes.
3) Control details
• Target SH during defrosting preliminary operation will be 6 to 10 K. (refer to 8-4-1 (See page 62))
• PMV control interval will be shorter than normal.
• Operation frequency will be fixed.
*1
Advance defrosting
Compressor
40.1 Hz
OFF
Outdoor fan
ON
OFF
4-way valve
On
OFF
Outdoor
PMV
Defrosting operation
500 pulse
430 pulse
0 pulse
0s
30s 40s
Dotted line shows a operating image.
*1. When TD ≥ 50 °C, Advance defrosting will be skipped.
67
0s 20s 30s 40s
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
7) Winding heating control
1) This control energizes the inactive compressor instead of the case heater to warm the compressor. The purpose is
to prevent the refrigerant from staying inside the compressor.
2) After the unit is installed, failure to perform energization for the given time period may cause the compressor to fail.
Also, when starting an operation long after the power left off, first energize the compressor before starting the
operation in the same way as a trial run.
3) Energization is determined by the TD sensor and TO sensor. If the TO sensor fails, the TE sensor automatically takes
over the operation. Determine if the TO sensor has failed check the LED’s on the outdoor unit PCB.
4) If TD is 30 °C or higher, the energization stops.
(Usual)
TO
18 °C
*Energization
15 °C
condition
TD 30 °C 10 °C
8 °C
Not energized
Intermittently energized
10 mins: ON / 5 mins: OFF
Output "equal to 40W"
Continuously energized
Output "equal to 40W"
(when TO sensor fails)
TE
20 °C
*Energization
18 °C
condition
TD 30 °C 12 °C
10 °C
Not energized
Intermittently energized
10 mins: ON / 5 mins: OFF
Output "equals to 40W"
Continuously energized
Output "equals to 40W"
Notes
During winding energization, energizing noise may be heard, but this is not abnormal.
8) Short circuit operation prevention control
1) In 11 minutes after the operation start, the compressor may not stop for protection. This status is not abnormal. (The
operation duration time of the compressor varies depending on a operation status.)
2) If the operation stops with the remote controller, the operation does not continue.
9) Over current protection control
1) A detection of abnormal current with the over current protection control stops the compressor.
2) Set the abnormality detection counter to 1, and restarts the compressor after 150 seconds.
3) When the stop by over current protection control counts 8 times, error code is displayed and the compressor does
not restart.
(Remote controller error code display: HO1)
68
Item
10) High pressure release control
1) To prevent excessive high pressure rise, operating frequency is controlled by the PD sensor.
2) If the PD sensor detects an abnormal stop zone pressure, the compressor stops and the abnormality detection
counter increments.
3) When the compressor stops in 2), the heat-pump operation restarts when the pressure decrease to zone "e" (normal
operation) after 150 seconds passed.
4) When the compressor stops in 2), the abnormality detection counter is cleared when the operation continues for 10
minutes. If the counter counts 10 times, error code is displayed on the remote-controller and the compressor does
not restart.
5) For details about an check code displayed, see the check code list. (See page 74)
4.10
4.00
3.90
PD sensor [MPa]
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
Normal operation
3.80
3.70
a
3.60
b,c
3.50
d
3.40
e
3.30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Compressor frequency [Hz]
80
90
11) Compressor case thermostat
The compressor case thermostat functions to protect the compressor when the blow-out temperature from the
compressor is too high.
• The compressor case thermostat on the upper part of compressor stops the compressor.
• The compressor will restart three minutes after stopping.
• If the compressor case thermostat functions again after restarting (functions at 125 °C), compressor stops and the
“H04” error code is indicated.
12) Bottom plate heater control
Control ON and OFF of the bottom plate heater using the outdoor temperature sensor (TO).
TO
+2
0
Bottom plate
heater is turned off
Bottom plate
heater is turned on
69
Item
8-4.
Outdoor unit
control
Operation flow and applicable data, etc.
13) 2-way valve control
To control the bypass 2-way valve, reducing the minimum capacity and reducing the pressure increase purpose.
Bypass circuit is connect the discharge pipe and the suction pipe of the compressor.
1)Bypass operation start condition
The operation start in the following cases. (On cases of 2-way valve.)
<Heating or hot water supply> Any of the following cases
Pd is the case of X zone.
•(To ≥ B zone) and (compressor operation Hz is low).
Pd is the case of Y zone.
(To ≥ B zone) and (compressor operation Hz is low) and (Operation of the previous time of 12 minutes or less)
<Defrosting> Any of the following cases
•TWI < 36 °C
Tg(Pd)
•TC+TWO<9 °C
X zone
<Cooling> Any of the following cases
60.0(3.73)
•(To ≤ B zone) and (compressor operation Hz is low)
•(To ≤ B zone) and (When the hydro unit is operating release control.)
The operation stop in the following cases. (Off cases of 2-way valve.)
When the 2-way valve turned on once, it does not turn off for 5 minutes.
<Heating or hot water supply> Any of the following cases
•(Pd ≤ Y zone) and (When the compressor rotational speed is
increasing.)
•(Pd ≤ Y zone) and (To ≤ C zone)
•When the compressor is stopped.
<Defrosting>
•When the compressor is stopped.
<Cooling> Any of the following cases
•(Compressor rotational speed is increasing.) and (The hydro unit is not
operating release control.)
•When the compressor rotational speed is increasing.
58.5(3.60)
Y zone
To
A zone
23
21
B zone
5
3
C zone
14) Start up from hibernation
This control operates at startup, in order to warm up the compressor by the heat from the water.
System is operated at a defrost cycle when the start condition is satisfied.
System is switched to the normal heating operation when the end condition is satisfied.
14-1)Start conditions
This control is operated when starting the compressor in a state that all of the following conditions is satisfy.
•Compressor off time is 2 hours or more (Also start up at the first time after turn on the power.)
•TD ≤ 40 °C and TWI ≥ 25 °C and TO ≤ 3 °C
14-2)End conditions
When one of the following conditions is satisfy, operation is switched to the normal heating.
•10 minutes has passed since operation started.
•TD ≥ TWI+10 °C
•TG ≥ TWI TG : Condensing temperature calculated from the Pd
•TWI < 25 °C
70
9
Method of defect diagnosis
In order to diagnose the defective part of the heat pump system, first understand the symptom of the defect.
(1) Check the operation status. (It does not move, or it moves but stops, etc.)
(2) Flashing display on the display part of the hydro unit.
(3) Check the “check code” by the remote controller.
Please refer to the following procedure of defect diagnosis for the identification.
No.
Procedure of defect diagnosis
Matters to be confirmed first
9-1
9-2
Non-defective program operations for the
protection of the heat pump unit.
Outline of the determination
diagram
9-3-1. Procedure of defect diagnosis
9-3-2. How to determine from the check
code on the remote controller
9-3-3. How to cancel a check code on the
remote controller
9-3-4. How to diagnose by error code
With reference to the "check code",
roughly identify the defect from the defect
diagnosis for the heat pump hot water
heater and determine the defective part
from individual symptoms.
Diagnosis flow chart for each
error code
9-4-1. Hydro unit failure detection
9-4-2. Outdoor unit failure detection
9-4-3. Temperature sensor, temperatureresistance characteristic table
Operation check by PC board
9-5-1. Operation check mode
The operation check mode allows to
determine good or not by checking the
operation of the 4-way valve, 2-way valve
and pulse motor valve.
Brief method for checking the
key components
9-6-1. Hydro unit
9-6-2. Outdoor unit
How to determine the presence of any
defect particularly in functional parts.
9-5
9-6
Check the power supply for the heat pump
hot water heater, the crossover between
the hydro unit and the outdoor unit, and the
installation of temperature sensors.
Non-defective operation (program operation)
9-3
9-4
9-1-1. Check the power supply voltage
9-1-2. Check for any miswiring of the
connection cables between the hydro
unit and the outdoor unit
9-1-3. About the installation of the
temperature sensor
Remark
71
9-1. Matters to be confirmed first
9-1-1. Check the power supply voltage
Check that the power supply voltage is AC220-230 V± 10% (signal phase). If the power supply voltage is not in this
range, it may not operate normally.
9-1-2. Check for any miswiring of the connection cables between
the hydro unit and the outdoor unit
The hydro unit and the outdoor unit are connected with three connection cables. Make sure the interconnecting
connections between the hydro unit and the outdoor unit terminal blocks are connected to the correct terminal
numbers. If not connected correctly, the heat pump system does not operate. However, a miswiring would not
cause damage to the equipment.
9-1-3. About the installation of the temperature sensor
If each sensor is removed due to the replacement of the water heat exchange or inverter board, or the replacement
of the refrigeration cycle parts, make sure to put the sensor back to the position where it was before.
• Each sensor position has a marking. Make sure to put it back to the exact position.
• Make sure to install it with a sensor holder so that the temperature sensing part of the sensor and the straight
part of the copper piping are attached with each other tightly.
• If the installation of the sensor is incomplete or the installed position is wrong, it will not perform a normal control
operation and may cause a defect such as a malfunction of the equipment or an occurrence of an abnormal
sound, etc.
9-2. Non-defective operation (program operation) … No fault
code display appears.
In order to control the heat pump unit, there are the following operations as the built-in program operations in the
microcomputer. If a claim occurs about the operation, please confirm whether it falls under any of the contents in
the following table.
If it does, please understand that the symptom is not a defect of the equipment, and it is an operation necessary
for the control and maintenance of the heat pump unit.
Table 9-2-1 Non-defective operation
No.
Operation of the heat pump system
Explanation
1
The compressor sometimes does not operate even within the
range of compressor “ON”.
The compressor does not operate during the operation of the
compressor reboot timer (3 min). Even after the power
activation, the compressor reboot timer continues to be active.
2
During the hot water supply or heating operation, without
reaching the set temperature, the compressor operation
frequency stays at a frequency of less than the maximum Hz or
lowers down.
It may be caused by the high temperature release control
(release protection control by the temperature of the water
heat exchanger) or the current release control, or the high
pressure release control.
3
The “Stop” operation on the remote controller will not stop the In order to deal with the temperature increase in the heat
circulation pump. (The same for hot water supply, heating and exchanger after stopping, the operation continues for 1 min
cooling)
after the compressor is stopped.
4
“ON” on the remote controller will not operate the compressor. When the outdoor temperature (TO sensor detection
(It will not operate even after the reboot delay timer elapsed)
temperature) is -25 °C or lower, the heat pump will not operate
in order to protect the compressor, and the heater will operate
instead.
When the power is turned on, it starts operation without
operating the remote controller.
• The auto restart operation may be working.
• The antifreeze operation may be working.
• If the TWI, TWO or THO sensor detects a temperature
below 4 °C, the operation changes from circulation pump
--->> circulation pump + heater.)
5
72
9-3. Outline of the determination diagram
The first determination of whether a defective part is in the hydro unit or the outdoor unit can be performed by the
following method.
9-3-1. Procedure of defect diagnosis
In the case of a defect, please apply the following procedure in order to find the defective part.
Defect
Confirm the check
code on the remote
controller display
Check code
A01-A13
Yes
Defect in Hydro unit
Yes
Abnormality in the
communication or setting
system
Yes
Abnormality in the water
heat exchange or outdoor
unit sensor system
No
Check code
L07-L16
No
Check code
FXX
No
Abnormality in the outdoor unit or hot-water
tank unit
9-3-2. How to determine from the check code on the remote
controller
If the defect is limited by the check code displayed on the remote controller, please repair the defect based on the
table on the next page.
The check codes are separated into two groups: software and hardware errors.
Since a hardware error cannot be cancelled without a part replacement etc., please perform a repair.
If its abnormality is determined, the abnormality is noticed by indicating the check code on the remote controller
check code display part while sounding off a buzzer.
Check code display part
MON
ZONE1
ZONE2
HEAT/COOL
HOT WATER
HOT WATER
9-3-3. How to cancel a check code on the remote controller
Press [
] or [
] button (on the operation side) to clear the check code.
Although the above procedure cancels the check code, the hardware error will be displayed again until the
hardware repair is completed.
73
9-3-4. How to diagnose by error code
Defect mode detected by the Hydro Unit
O ... Possible
× .... Not possible
Check
code
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
Determination and action
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
Pump or flowing quantity error
1) Detected by TC sensor
TC≥63 °C is detected in the heating or
hot water supply heat pump operation
(except for defrosting).
2) Detected by flow switch abnormality
When no signal of the flow switch is
showing 2 min after the built-in
circulation pump operation started.
A01
3) Detection of chattering abnormality in
the flow switch input
Chattering detection: Detects input
changes (OFF⇔ON) 4 times within
10 seconds during operation.
4
82
8
82
8
82
1. Disconnection of the flow switch
connector.
2. Defect of the flow switch.
2
82
O
1. Check the water inlet, water outlet
and heater outlet (TWI, TWO, THO)
sensors.
2. Defect of the backup heater (defect
automatic reset thermostat).
1
83
O
1. Check the hot water cylinder sensor
(TTW).
2. Check the hot water cylinder thermal
cut-out.
1
84
Heating8
Hot water8
Cooling4
85
1
86
Heating
×
Hot water
×
O
4) Disconnection of the flow switch
connector
When the stopped built-in circulation
pump starts its operation, the flow
switch status is detecting "water flow".
A02
A03
Temperature increase error (heating)
When one of the TWI, TWO and THO
sensors exceeds 70 °C.
Temperature increase error (hot water
supply)
When the TTW sensor exceeds 85 °C.
Heating
×
Hot water
O
Heating
O
Hot water
×
Antifreeze operation (1)
A04
1)TWO>20 °C condition:
2×TC+TWO≤-12 °C is detected.
2)TWO≤20 °C condition:
TC+TWO≤4 °C is detected.
3)TWI≤10 °C is detected during
defrosting.
1. Almost no or little water flow.
• Not enough vent air
• Dirt clogging in the water piping
system.
• The water piping is too long.
• Installation of buffer tank and
secondary pump
1. Almost no or little water flow.
• Dirt clogging in the water piping
system.
• The water piping is too long, or too
short.
O
×
2. Check the heater power circuit.
• Power supply voltage, breaker,
power supply connection
3. Set the presence of the backup
heater.
4. Check the water inlet, water outlet
and heat exchange (TWI, TWO, TC)
sensors and Flow Switch.
A05
Piping antifreeze operation
Activating the heater under the condition
of TWO<4orTWI<4orTHO<4 does not
achieve TWO,TWI,THO≥5 °C after
30 min elapsed.
1. Check the heater power circuit.
• Power supply voltage, breaker,
power supply connection
O
O
74
2. Check the water inlet, water outlet
and heater outlet sensors (TWI,
TWO, THO).
3. Disconnection of the backup heater.
Check
code
A07
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Combination error
Model name of the Hydro unit is
different.
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
O
O
A09
A10
Overheat protection operation
When the thermostat of the backup
heater activates during the operation of
the heat pump or backup heater.
When the thermostat operation is
activated while it has been stopped.
1. Check DP_SW13_4 is set to "ON".
1
—
×
1. Almost no or little water flow.
2. Defect of the flow switch.
3. On-load cooling or prolonged
defrosting (a lot of frost formation)
under the above conditions.
4. Defect in the low pressure sensor.
5. Check the refrigeration cycle (gas
leak)
8
87
1. No water (heating without water) or
no water flow.
2. Defect of the flow switch.
2
3. Defect of the backup heater (poor
automatic reset thermostat).
1
Antifreeze operation (2)
When TC-TWO<-15K detected in
cooling mode.
×
1. Almost few water flow.
2. Defect of the flow switch.
3. Low refrigerant.
10
89
Operation of the release protection
When the TWO release counts to 10.
×
1. Almost no water flow.
2. Defect of the flow switch.
3. Check the water outlet temperature
sensor (TWO).
A11
10
90
O
1. Activated by a large load of heating
or hot water supply.
2. Check the heater power circuit
(backup or hot water cylinder
heater).
• Power supply voltage, breaker,
power supply connection
1
91
2
92
1
—
Heating
×
Hot water
O
O
Heating
Cooling
×
×
Hot water
O
A12
Heating, hot water heater
The antifreeze control is detected under
the condition of TWI<15 °C while
TWI≥15 °C, TTW≥20 °C is not detected
after the heater backup.
O
Heating
A13
Pump error
×
Hot water
O
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
×
Low pressure sensor operation error
The low pressure sensor detected 0.2
MPa or less.
A08
Determination and action
×
1. Pump has stopped by a certain
cause.
• Low supply voltage.
• High humidity around the electric box
of the pump.
• Dew condensation to the electric
board of the pump.
• Once turn off the power supply to the
system and turn on again and
operate the system.
88
2. Check the Flow switch in the Hydro
unit.
E03
Regular communication error
between hydro unit and remote
controller
When there is no regular communication
from the remote controller for 3 min, or
when no remote controller is equipped.
×
O
75
1. Check remote controller connection.
2. Defect in the remote controller.
Check
code
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
E04
Regular communication error
between hydro unit and outdoor unit
The serial signal cannot be received
from outdoor.
O
E08
Duplicate address of Hydro unit, or
Duplicate master Hydro unit during
Group control
E18
Determination and action
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
O
1. Check the serial circuit.
• Miswiring of the crossover between
the water heat exchanger and the
outdoor unit
1
92
×
O
1. Set the address No. of the Rotary
switch "SW01" correctly for each
Hydro unit.
1
—
Regular communication error
between master Hydro unit and slave
Hydro unit during Group control
×
O
1. Check the Hydro unit connection.
• Miswiring of the master and slave
Hydro unit.
1
—
F03
TC sensor error
Open or short circuit in the heat
exchange temperature sensor.
O
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the heat exchange
temperature sensor (TC).
1
93
F10
TWI sensor error
Open or short circuit in the water inlet
temperature sensor.
O
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the water inlet
temperature sensor (TWI).
1
95
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the water outlet
temperature sensor (TWO).
1
95
F11
TWO sensor error
Open or short circuit in the water outlet
temperature sensor.
Heating
×
Hot water
O
76
Check
code
F14
F17
F18
F19
F20
F23
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
TTW sensor error
Open or short circuit in the hot water
cylinder sensor.
TFI sensor error
Open or short circuit in the floor
temperature sensor.
(Only when zone 2 is used)
THO sensor error
Open or short circuit in the heater outlet
temperature sensor.
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
Heating
Low pressure sensor error
When PS<0.07 MPa is detected for 90
sec or more. (cooling, defrosting)
When PS<0.07 MPa is detected for 10
min or more. (hot water supply, heating)
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the hot water cylinder
sensor (TTW).
1
96
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the floor-inlet
temperature sensor (TFI).
1
96
O
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the heater outlet
temperature sensor (THO).
1
96
×
1. Check for any disconnection of the
heater outlet temperature sensor
(THO).
2. Defect of the flow switch.
1
97
×
1. Check the connection of the floorinlet temperature sensor (TFI).
1
98
O
O
1. Check the connection (body or
connection wiring) of the low
pressure sensor.
2. Check the resistance value of the
low pressure sensor.
3. Check the refrigeration cycle (gas
leak)
1
99
×
Hot water
O
Heating
×
Hot water
O
Heating
×
Hot water
O
Detection of THO disconnection error Heating
When TWO–THO>15K is detected and
×
30 sec elapsed.
Hot water
O
TFI sensor error
When TWO–TFI>40K is detected and
TFI<TWI–5K is detected 60 sec.
Determination and action
Heating
×
Hot water
O
F29
EEROM error
Inconsistency is detected once without
verify ACK after writing to EEPROM.
×
×
1. Replace the water heat exchange
control board.
1
99
F30
Extended IC error
When the extended IC is abnormal.
×
×
1. Replace the water heat exchange
control board.
1
99
L02
Combination error
Model name of the outdoor unit is
different.
×
×
1. Check the model name of the
outdoor unit.
1
99
L07
Communication error
Individual hydro units have a group line.
×
×
1. Replace the water heat exchange
control board.
1
99
×
×
1. Check the setting of the FC01
capability specifications.
HWS-P805xx-E = 0012
HWS-P1105xx-E = 0015
1
100
×
×
1. Check the body DP-SW12_2,3.
1
100
O
1. Check the remote controller
connection.
2. Defect in the remote controller.
3. Set the address No. of the Rotary
switch "SW01" correctly for each
Hydro unit.
1
—
L09
L16
P31
Communication error
The capability code for the hydro unit
has not been set.
Setting error
When ZONE1 has not been set, while
ZONE2 has been set.
Slave Hydro unit error which occurs
when error occurs in master Hydro
unit
×
77
Defect mode detected by the outdoor unit
O ... Possible
× .... Not possible
Check
code
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
Determination and action
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
F04
TD sensor error
Open or short circuit in the discharge
temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the discharge sensor
(TD).
4
94
110
F06
TE sensor error
Open or short circuit in the heat
exchange temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the heat exchange
temperature sensor (TE).
4
94
110
F07
TL sensor error
Open or short circuit in the heat
exchange temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the heat exchange
temperature sensor (TL).
4
94
110
F08
TO sensor error
Open or short circuit in the outdoor
temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the outdoor
temperature sensor (TO).
1
95
111
F12
TS sensor error
Open or short circuit in the suction
temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the suction
temperature sensor (TS).
4
111
F13
TH sensor error
Open or short circuit in the heat-sink
temperature sensor.
O
×
1. Check the resistance value and
connection of the heat-sink
temperature sensor (TH).
8
111
F15
TE, TS sensors error
TE, TS sensor connections are
opposite.
O
×
1. Check for any wrong installation of
the heat exchange temperature
sensor (TE) and the suction
temperature sensor (TS).
4
111
F24
PD sensor error
Open or short circuit in the high pressure
sensor.
O
×
1. Check the value of PD sensor by the
remote controller.
4
112
F31
EEPROM error
O
×
1
112
×
1. Check the power supply voltage
(AC220-230 V±10%).
2. Over-loaded condition of the
refrigeration cycle.
3. Check that the service valve is fully
open.
8
101
O
×
1. Defect of compressor (lock)
– Replace the compressor.
2. Defect of compressor wiring (open
phase).
8
102
O
×
1. Replace the outdoor inverter control
board.
8
—
Compressor breakdown
H01
1 When the operation frequency lowers
due to the current release 40 sec or
later after the compressor activation
and it stops by underrunning the
minimum frequency.
2 When the operation frequency lowers
due to the current limit control and it
stops by underrunning the minimum
frequency.
3 When an excess current is detected
0.8 sec or later after the compressor
activation.
O
Compressor lock
H02
H03
1 When the input current is more than
zero 20 sec or later after the
compressor activation and the
activation has not been completed.
Defect in the current detection circuit
78
Check
code
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
Operation of case thermostat
When the case thermostat exceeds
125 °C.
H04
Determination and action
O
×
1. Check the refrigeration cycle (gas
leak).
2. Check the case thermostat and
connector.
3. Check that the service valve is fully
open.
4. Defect of the pulse motor valve.
5. Check for kinked piping.
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
10
102
L10
Unset service PC board jumper
Jumpers J800-J803 have not been cut.
O
×
1. Cut J800-J803.
1
103
L15
Combination error
Model name of the Hydro unit is
different.
×
×
1. Check the model name of the Hydro
unit.
2. Check DP_SW13_4 is set to "ON".
1
103
L29
The communication between the
outdoor PC board MUCs error
No communication signal between IPDU
and CDB.
O
×
1. Replace the outdoor control board.
1
103
1. Check the refrigeration cycle (gas
leak).
2. Defect of the pulse motor valve.
3. Check the resistance value of the
discharge temperature sensor (TD).
4
103
10
104
P03
The outlet temperature error
When the discharge temperature sensor
(TD) exceeds 111 °C.
O
×
P04
The high pressure switch error
O
×
P05
The power supply voltage error
When the power supply voltage is
extremely high or low.
O
×
1. Check the power supply voltage.
(AC220-230 V±10%).
8
105
×
1. Check the thread fastening and
heat-sink grease between the
outdoor control board and the heatsink.
2. Check the heat-sink fan duct.
3. Check the resistance value of the
heat-sink temperature sensor (TH).
4
105
×
1. Check the refrigeration cycle (gas
leak).
2. Check that the service valve is fully
open.
3. Defect of the pulse motor valve.
4. Check for kinked piping.
5. Check the resistance value of the
discharge temperature sensor (TD)
and the suction temperature sensor
(TS).
6. Check the PD sensor by remote
controller.
8
106
×
1. Check the operation of the 4-way
valve unit or the coil characteristics.
2. Defect of the pulse motor valve.
3. Check the resistance value of the
heat exchange temperature sensor
(TE) and the suction temperature
sensor (TS).
4
107
Overheating of heat-sink error
When the heat-sink exceeds 105 °C.
O
P07
P15
Detection of gas leak
When the discharge temperature sensor
(TD) exceeds 106 °C for consecutive 10
min.
When the suction temperature sensor
(TS) exceeds 60 °C for cooling or 40 °C
for heating for 10 consecutive min.
When TG ≤ TC -10 K is detected and
TG ≤ TWI-15 K is detected 10min. (hot
water supply, heating)
When TG ≤ TE -12 K is detected for
10min. (cooling)
P19
The 4-way valve inversion error
When the heat exchange temperature
sensor (TE) exceeds 30 °C or the
suction temperature sensor (TS)
exceeds 50 °C during the heat pump
operation.
O
O
79
Check
code
Diagnostic functional operation
Operational cause
Backup Automatic
operation
reset
High pressure protection operation
When an abnormal stop occurs due to
the high pressure release control.
When the high pressure sensor (PD)
detects 4.05 MPa.
O
P20
P22
P26
Outdoor fan system error
When a DC fan rotor position detection
NG, element short circuit, loss of
synchronization, or abnormal motor
current occurs.
Short circuit of the compressor driver
element error
When an abnormal short circuit of IGBT
is detected.
O
O
×
O
1. Check that the service valve is fully
open.
2. Defect of the pulse motor valve.
3. Check the outdoor fan system
(including clogging).
4. Over-filling of refrigerant.
5. Check the value of the high pressure
sensor (PD).
6. The water piping is too short.
Install a buffer tank, or set the setting
temperature lower.
Number of
abnormalities Detailed
for
item
confirmation
10
108
×
1. Check the lock status of the motor
fan.
2. Check the connection of the fan
motor cable connector.
3. Check the power supply voltage.
(AC220~230 V±10%)
8
109
×
1. P26 abnormality occurs when
operating with the compressor
wiring disconnected … Check the
control board.
2. No abnormality occurs when
operating with the compressor
wiring disconnected … Compressor
rare short.
8
109
×
1. Even if the connection lead wire of
the compressor is disconnected, it
stops due to an abnormality in the
position detection … Replace the
inverter control board.
2. Check the wire wound resistor of the
compressor. Short circuit
… Replace the compressor.
8
109
Compressor rotor position error
The rotor position in the compressor
cannot be detected.
P29
Determination and action
80
Defect mode detected by the remote controller
Diagnostic functional operation
Check code
Operational cause
Status of airconditioning
No communication between hydro Stop
Not
unit an remote controller
displaying at • The remote controller wiring is not
all
connected correctly.
(cannot
• The hydro unit has not been turned
operate by
on.
the remote
controller)
E01
E02
E09
Condition
–
Determination and action
Defect in the remote controller power
supply
1. Check the remote controller wiring.
2. Check the remote controller.
3. Check the hydro unit power supply
wiring.
4. Check the water heat exchange
control board.
Displayed when
No communication between hydro Stop
(Automatic reset) the abnormality
unit and remote controller
is detected.
• Disconnection of the crossover
between the remote controller and
the base unit of the Hydro unit
(detected on the remote controller
side).
Defect in the reception of the remote
controller
1. Check the remote controller
crossover.
2. Check the remote controller.
3. Check the hydro power supply wiring.
4. Check the water heat exchanger
board.
Defect in the signal transmission
to the hydro unit.
(Detected on the remote controller
side)
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) the abnormality
is detected.
Defect in the transmission of the remote
controller
1. Check the transmitter circuit inside the
remote controller.
… Replace the remote controller.
Several remote controller base
units
(Detected on the remote controller
side)
Stop
(The handset
continues)
1.2 Check several base units with the
remote controller
… The base unit is only one, and others
are handsets.
81
Displayed when
the abnormality
is detected.
9-4. Diagnosis flow chart for each error code
9-4-1. Hydro unit failure detection
[A01] Error Pump flow determination
[A01] occurs
Operation restarts
No (No pump sound)
Built-in circulation
pump rotates
Perform
air vent
Yes
Yes
Flow switch is
connected to board
Excess air noise
comes from inside
the pump
No
Connect flow switch
connector to board
No
Connect pump
connector to board
Yes
Pump is
connected to board
No
Yes
Flow switch is normal
No
Replace flow switch
No
Chattering noise comes
from flow switch
Yes
Replace pump
No
Pump stops 2-3
minutes after its rotation
started
Yes
No
Flow shortage
(Identify causes, and resolve)
TC sensor characteristic
is correct
No
Replace TC sensor
Dirt clogging inside
water circuit
Yes
Remove waste
(strainer)
12 M or longer water
pipe to a branch,
or 5 or less branches
Flow switch is normal
No
Fit buffer tank and the
second pump
Attach or replace
flow switch
Yes
Water heat exchanger control board
is defective, replace it
82
[A02] Error Temperature rise and error short circuit
Start
(TWI,TWO,THO ≥ 70 °C)
TWI, TWO, and THO
sensor characteristics are
correct
No
Replace TWI, TWO,
and THO sensors
Yes
Flow switch is normal
No
Replace flow switch
Yes
Water outlet
temperature is 70 °C
or higher
No
Yes
Hot water from
boiler or other circuits does
not come in
Yes
Correct water circuit
(To prevent hot water of
other circuits from entering)
Yes
Failure of backup heater
(Too large heater input,
thermostat short circuit)
No
Backup heater is energized
(Measure heater current)
No
Replace water heat exchange control board
Replace heater unit
• If Boiler setting is ON (DPSW13-2 is ON) and FC62 is “1”, the A02 error is not detected.
83
[A03] Error Temperature rise and error short circuit
Start
TTW sensor
characteristic is correct
(TTW ≥ 85 °C is detected)
No
Replace TTW sensor
Yes
Hot water cylinder heater
is energized
No
Yes
Mg-sw (RY05) for
heater operates
No
Replace Mg-sw
Operating noise at normal time
Yes
At normal
temperature, tank thermostat
is energized
No
Yes
Hot water cylinder
thermostat operates
No
Replace hot water
cylinder thermostat
Operation
temperature 82 °C
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
84
[A04] Error Freeze prevention control
When the outside temperature and inlet water temperature is low (approx. 20 °C or lower) and the room load is
large (operation frequency ≥ rating), the freeze prevention control may be activated.
Start
Operation restart
Perform
air vent
Yes
Secure water
circulation amount
Excess air
inside pump
Replace flow switch
(inside strainer, etc)
No
Chattering from
flow switch
Dirt clogging
inside water circuit
Yes
Circulation
flow shortage
12 M or longer
water pipe to
a branch, or 5 or
less branches
Fit buffer tank and the
second pump
No
Short circuit piping
Total water amount in
the system is too little,
or water piping is too
short
Yes
No
Water heat
exchanger board DP_SW11-1
is ON
No
Fit buffer tank and the
second pump
Set DP_SW11-1 to ON
Yes
Backup
heater terminal has
AC 220-230 V
( ± 10 %)
No
Power is
connect to backup
heater terminal
Yes
No
Connect backup heater
power cable
Yes
Set heater breaker to ON
Check hydro wiring
Backup
heater element
is conductive
No
(Backup heater NG)
Replace backup heater unit
Yes
TC, TWO, TWI
sensor characteristics
are correct
No
(Refer
to Characteristic
table
on page
113)
(See Characteristic
table
on page
101)
Yes
Replace water heat
exchange control board
85
Replace TC, TWO,
and TWI sensors
[A05] Error Piping freeze prevention control
Restart
TWI 4, TWO 4, or
THO 4 is detected
Circulation pump keeps
being energized or 3 minutes
passed after the start
Water heat
exchange control board
DPSW11-1 is ON
No
Set water heat board
DPSW11-1 to ON
Yes
Backup heater terminal
has 220-230 V (± 10 %)
No
Yes
Power is connect to
built-in heater terminal
No
Yes
Backup heater element
is conductive
No
Place power cable for
backup heater
Set breaker for backup heater
to ON, or Check hydro
electronic wiring
(Backup heater NG)
Replace backup heater
and safety valve
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TWI, TWO,
and THO sensors
Yes
TWI, TWO, THO
sensor characteristics
are correct
Yes
Replace water heat
exchange control board
86
[A08] Error Low pressure sensor lowering operation failure (Cooling / Defrosting
operation)
Start
No
Flow switch is normal
Replace flow switch
Yes
Remove sufficiently
excess air
Excess air
noise comes from
inside pump
Yes
Secure water
circulation amount
No
Chattering
noise comes from
flow switch
Yes
Waste stuck inside
water circuit
Remove waste
12 M or longer water
pipe to a branch,
or 5 or less branches
Place buffer tank and
the second pump
Circulation flow
shortage
No
Continued
operation at low outside
temperature and at 15 °C or lower
set temperature
Yes
Raise set temperature
(Cooling overload operation)
No
Defrosting
takes 15 mins or longer
(Frost remains)
Yes
Defrost outdoor unit
where frost remains
No
Low pressure sensor
is normal
No
Replace low pressure sensor
Yes
Replace water heat
exchange control board
87
[A09] Error Overheat prevention thermostat failure (Hot water supply / Heating operation)
Start
Water cycle contains water
No
Put water into water circuit
(Recommended: 1 - 2 Bar)
Yes
Flow switch is normal
No
Replace flow switch
Yes
At normal temperature,
overheat preventive thermostat
is normal
No
Replace heater unit
exchanger air vent valve
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
or overheat preventive thermostat failure
*Replace water heat exchange control board or overheat preventive thermostat failure: After the control
board is replaced, if the same operation repeats, the overheat preventive thermostat is determined as
defective (does not operate at 75 °C).
88
[A10] Error Freeze prevention control (2) (Cooling only)
Start
Flow switch is normal
No
Replace flow switch
Yes
Remove sufficiently
excess air
Excess air
noise comes from
inside pump
Yes
Secure water
circulation amount
No
Chattering
noise comes from
flow switch
Yes
Waste stuck inside
water circuit
Remove waste
12 M or longer water
pipe to a branch,
or 5 or less branches
Place buffer tank and
the second pump
Circulation flow
shortage
No
Sufficient refrigerant
Yes
Operating with
no load on water
circuit?
No
Recharge refrigerant
Note: Determined at TWO-TWI temperature during operation at a pressure of Ps
Yes
Raise the set water temperature.
Add fan coils.
No
Replace control
board.
89
[A11] Error Release protection operation
Start
Flow switch is normal
No
Replace flow switch
Yes
Remove sufficiently
excess air
Excess air
noise comes from
inside pump
Yes
Secure water
circulation amount
No
Chattering
noise comes from
flow switch
Yes
Waste stuck inside
water circuit
Remove waste
12 M or longer water
pipe to a branch,
or 5 or less branches
Place buffer tank and
the second pump
Circulation flow
shortage
No
TWI sensor is
attached to pipe
No
Attach TWI sensor
Yes
TWI and TWO
sensor characteristics
are normal
No
Replace TWI or TWO sensor
Yes
Replace water heat
exchange control board
90
[A12] Error Heating or Hot water supply heater failure
Restart
Operation starts under
10 ≤ TWI 20 °C
Freeze prevention control is detected once
Heater backup operation
Heating: Booster heater
Hot water supply: Hot water cylinder heater
After 1 hour since heater operation
started, neither TWI ≥ 15 °C
nor TTW ≥ 20 °C is met
Water heat
exchanger board DPSW11-1,2
is ON
A12 abnormality detection
No
Set water heat board
DPSW11-1,2 to ON
Yes
Backup heater or
hot water cylinder terminal
has 220-230 V ± 10 %
AC220-230 V±10 %=
(single phase type).
AC380-400 V±10 %=
(3 phase type).
No
Power is connect
to backup heater or hot water
cylinder terminal
Yes
Yes
Backup heater element
is conductive
No
No
(Backup heater NG)
Place electric wire for
backup heater
Place electric wire for
hot water cylinder
Set breaker for backup
heater to ON
Set breaker for hot water
cylinder to ON
or check hydro wiring
Replace booster heater
unit and safety valve
Yes
Hot water
cylinder heater element
is conductive
No
(Hot water cylinder heater NG)
(Refer to hot water
cylinder guide)
Yes
TWI, TTW sensor
characteristics are
normal
Replace hot water
cylinder heater
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat
exchange control board
91
Replace TWI or TTW
sensor
[A13] Pump error
Start
Input voltage is appropriate
No
Input appropriate voltage
Yes
The water pump is
locking by some factor
Yes
Reject the factor
No
Replace pump
92
[E04] Error
Outdoor unit operates
No
Yes
Yes
Hydro unit
Internal wiring and
connecting wire (1, 2, 3)
are correct
No
Correct wiring and
connecting wire
No
Correct connector and
terminal block wiring
No
Check water heat
exchanger board
If defective, replace it
Yes
CN04 connector
and terminal block (1, 2, 3) wiring
are normal
Yes
When power is
on again, D502 (Amber LED)
blinks
Yes
Check water heat exchanger
control board
If defective, replace it
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
[F03] Error TC sensor failure
Start
TC sensor
connector (CN203) is
connected
No
Correct TC sensor
connection
Yes
TC sensor
resistance characteristic
is normal
No
Replace TC sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
93
[F04] Error TD sensor failure
Start
TD sensor
connector (CN603) is
connected
No
Correct TD sensor
connection
Yes
TD sensor
resistance characteristic
is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TD sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F06] Error TE sensor failure
Start
TE sensor
connector (CN601) is
connected
No
Correct TE sensor
connection
Yes
TE sensor
resistance characteristic
is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TE sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F07] Error TL sensor failure
Start
TL sensor
connector (CN604) is
connected
No
Correct TL sensor
connection
Yes
TL sensor
resistance characteristic
is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
94
Replace TL sensor
[F08] Error TO sensor failure
Start
TO sensor
connector (CN602) is
connected
No
Correct TO sensor
connection
Yes
TO sensor
resistance characteristic
is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TO sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F10] Error TWI sensor failure
Start
TWI sensor
connector (CN205) is
connected
No
Correct TWI sensor
connection
Yes
TWI sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TWI sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F11] Error TWO sensor failure
Start
TWO sensor
connector (CN205) is
connected
No
Correct TWO sensor
connection
Yes
TWO sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
95
Replace TWO sensor
[F14] Error TTW sensor failure
Start
TTW sensor
connector (CN214) is
connected
No
Correct TTW sensor
connection
Yes
TTW sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TTW sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F17] Error TFI sensor failure
Start
TFI sensor
connector (CN213) is
connected
No
Correct TFI sensor
connection
Yes
TFI sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TFI sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
[F18] Error THO sensor failure
Start
THO sensor
connector (CN206) is
connected
No
Correct THO sensor
connection
Yes
THO sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
96
Replace THO sensor
[F19] Error THO sensor detach failure
Start
THO sensor
is attached to pipe
No
Attach THO sensor
to pipe
Yes
THO sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace THO sensor
Yes
TWO sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
97
Replace TWO sensor
[F20] Error TFI detach failure
Start
Mixing valve is attached.
No
Attach a mixing valve.
Yes
Mixing valve connection
is correct.
No
(Refer to wiring diagram of hydro unit on
page 20)
Make the mixing valve
connection correct.
Yes
Mixing valve setting
is correct.
No
Make the mixing valve
setting correct.
FC_0C: Mixing valve running time
(30sec to 120sec)
Yes
TFI sensor
is attached to pipe
No
Attach TFI sensor
to pipe
Yes
TFI sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TFI sensor
Yes
TWI sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Replace TWI sensor
Yes
TWO sensor
characteristic is normal
No
(Refer to Characteristic table on page 113)
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
98
Replace TWO sensor
[F23] Error Low pressure sensor detach failure
Start
Low pressure sensor
is detached (CN207, 212)
Yes
Attach low pressure sensor
No
When operation
is stopped, low pressure sensor
is normal *1
No
Replace low pressure sensor
Yes
Replace water heat exchange control board
*1 How to determine: When operation is stopped
[F29] Error EEPROM failure
A failure is detected in the IC10 non-volatile memory on the water heat exchanger board during a hot water supply
unit operation. Replace the service board.
* If the unit does not have EEPROM inserted when the power is turned on, or if EEPROM data read or write is
unavailable, automatic address mode repeats. In this case, the intensive control unit displays [97 Abnormal].
(Approx. 3 mins)
(Approx. 1 mins)
(Power on)
Handy remote
"Setting"
controller displays
disappears
"Setting"
Reboot
(reset)
(Repeat)
[F30] Error Enhanced IC failure
Enhanced IC on water heat exchanger control board is abnormal.
Replace the water heat exchanger control board to a service board.
[L02] Combination Error
The model name of the outdoor unit is not HWS-P805HR-E or HWS-P1105HR-E.
Replace the outdoor unit with the proper model.
[L07] Error
At the time of power on, detecting the above failure automatically activates the automatic address setting
mode.
(Check code is not output)
Note that if the above failure is detected in the automatic address setting mode, a check code may be output.
99
[L09] Error
Hydro unit capacity
is not set
Yes
Set hydro unit capacity data
Setting item code (FC_01)
8 kW = 12
11 kW = 15
No
Water heat exchange control
board (MCC-1511) Check
If defective, replace it
[L16] Error
In DP_SW12-2, 3 of main unit water heat exchanger, if ZONE1 is not set and ZONE2 is set, [L16] displays
abnormality.
Set correctly DP_SW12-2, 3.
100
9-4-2. Outdoor unit failure detection
Diagnosis procedure for each check code
• One check code may indicate multiple symptoms. In such a case, see the LED indication on the outdoor board
to narrow down the check details.
• The handy remote controller displays a check code only when the same failure repeatedly occurs while the LED
on the outdoor board indicates an error even if it occurs only once. This may cause indication inconsistency
between the remote controller and LED.
Outdoor board LED indication method
Indication switching
• One or more LEDs of D800 through D804 lit yellow indicates
that a failure occurred. <Indication 1>
• With the status above, pressing the SW800 button for one
second causes the yellow LED to blink. <Indication 2>
• Pressing again SW800 for one second or longer returns to
<Indication 1>.
• The combination of <Indication 1> and <Indication 2> can
determine what kind of abnormality.
4
3
ON
2
3
2
1
ON
<Indication 1>
<Indication 2>
(Normal) (Abnormality occurs)(Press SW800)
D800 (yellow)
D801 (yellow)
D802 (yellow)
D803 (yellow)
D804 (yellow)
D805 (green)
(Example of outlet temperature sensor failure)
Off
Check code
[H01]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
<Abnormality now>
SW803 All OFF (Initial status)
4
<Latest abnormality>
SW803 1 only is ON
1
Dip switch setting
• Setting 1 only of SW803 to ON indicates the latest failure.
Because the error log is recorded, you can see the detail even
after the power is once turned off. (Not including outside air
temperature sensor (TO) failure)
• After check work is done or when outside air temperature
sensor (TO) failure is detected, set all the SW803 switches to
OFF.
(An abnormality now is indicated.)
Light
Blink
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Compressor fails]
Power voltage is normal.
AC220-230 V±10 %
No
Improve power line
Yes
Wiring connection is normal.
No
Compressor lead (Board side, compressor
side reactor lead, power lead)
Check and correct wiring
connection
Yes
Abnormally over loaded
Yes
Deal with or remove causes
No
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
101
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
Check code
[H02]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Compressor lock]
Power voltage is normal.
AC220-230 V±10 %
No
Improve power line
Yes
Wiring connection is normal.
Compressor lead (board side,
compressor side) reactor, power lead
No
Check and correct
wiring connection
Yes
No
Compressor is normal.
Yes
No
Refrigerant stays inside.
Lock compressor and
replace it.
Yes
Pulse motor valve operates
normally.
Yes
Check outdoor board
If defective, replace it
[H04]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
No
TE, TS sensor pulse
motor valve check
If defective, replace
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[Case thermostat operation]
CN609 connector and case
thermostat is normal.
No
Correct connector
Replace case thermostat
No
Check outdoor board
If defective, replace it
Yes
If case thermostat is short circuited,
cooling and heating can operate.
Yes
PC board
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
No
No gas leakage.
Enough Refrigerant.
Correct defective portion
Re-charge refrigerant
Yes
Service valve is fully opened.
No
Open fully service valve
Yes
Pulse motor valve is normal.
Yes
Check for piping collapse and break.
If defective, repair or replace it.
102
No
Correct defective portion
Replace defective parts
Check code
[L10]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Model not set] Only when service board is used
Cut jumper line by following the instruction
comes with the service board package
[L15]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[Combination failure between the hydro unit]
Replace the hydro unit with the proper model
[L29]
* Any of the following abnormality may occur.
Seeing the LED on the outdoor board can determine which abnormality occurs.
Communication failure between MCUs, Heat sink temperature sensor (TH) failure, EEPROM
failure, Model not specified, Heat sink overheat failure, gas leakage detection, 4-way valve
invert failure
<Indication 1> <Indication 2> [Communication failure between MCUs]
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
[P03]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
PC board
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
[Abnormal outlet temperature]
No gas leakage.
Appropriate refrigerant amount.
No
Correct defective portion
Re-charge refrigerant
No
Correct defective portion
Replace defective parts
Yes
Deal with or remove
causes
No
Correct connector
Replace sensor
Yes
Pulse motor valve is normal.
Yes
Abnormally over loaded
No
CN603 connector is normal.
TD sensor resistance is normal
Yes
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
103
PC board
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
Check code
[P04]
Outdoor LED
indication
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
* Any of the following abnormality may occur.
Seeing the LED on the outside board can determine which abnormality occurs.
1.High pressure sensor activated.
2.Power source failure (Vdc)
3.Hi pressure protection operation
4.Case thermostat operation
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure SW system error]
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat operation.
Doesn’t high pressure switch
operate?
NO
NO
Is circuit wiring normal?
Wiring check,
Correct.
YES
YES
Are parts of
high pressure switch normal?
NO
Parts check
Defective → Replace
YES
Is service valve fully opened?
NO
Open service valve fully.
YES
Reset the power supply and
then do a test run according
to the season.
B ← Cooling operation
C ← Heating operation
Check Comp. IPDU PC board
Defective → Replace
B Cooling operation.
Does cooling outdoor fan
normally operate?
NO
YES
Is there no fan breakage
or coming-off?
NO
YES
Repair defective position.
Connection of connectors,
Fan IPDU, Fan motor, Wiring.
Is there any element
which blocks heat exchanger
of the outdoor unit?
1. Clogging of heat exchanger
2. Short circuit
YES
Elimination of
blocking element
NO
Overcharge of refrigerant /
Clogging / Pipe breakage /
Abnormal overload
C
Heating operation
Does the heating outdoor fan
normally operate?
NO
YES
Are connections of
connectors,capacitors
and fan motor normal?
NO
YES
Is there any element which
blocks hydro heat exchanger?
1. Filter clogging
2. Clogging of heat exchanger
3. Shor t circuit
YES
Elimination of
blocking element
Repair
defective position.
NO
Clogging by refrigerant
overcharge / Pipe breakage /
Abnormal overload
Are characteristics
of TC and TCJ sensor
resistance value normal?
NO
YES
Check hydro PC board
Defective → Replace
104
Replace
TC or TCJ sensor.
Check code
[P05]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Power source failure (voltage defective, open phase)]
Power voltage abnormal drops or rise
(AC220-230 V±10 %: single phase)
Yes
Check electric work
No
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
[P07]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
PC board
P805HR-E,
P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
[Heat sink overheat failure]
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
The screws are loose in
motor drive element,
Q200/300/400, of outdoor
control board and rectifier,
DB01/02/03. (MCC-1571)
Radiation grease was not
applied to backside of
Q200, DB01, DB02,
or DB03.
Yes
Apply radiation grease as
needed Tighten screws
(Be sure to place back the
insulation sheet between
Q300/400 and the heat
sink.)
No
Is not the ventilation flue
of the heat sink blocked?
Is not the fan blocked?
(Short-circuit, etc.)
No
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
105
Yes
Remove obstacles,
Deal with short circuit
Check code
[P15]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Gas leakage detection]
No gas leakage.
Appropriate refrigerant amount.
No
Correct defective portion
Re-charge refrigerant
No
Correct defective portion
Replace defective parts
Yes
Pulse motor valve is normal.
Yes
Service valve is fully opened.
No
Open fully service valve
Yes
Yes
Piping collapse
Repair or replace pipe
No
Temperature sensor check
Discharge sensor CN603
Suction sensor CN600
NG
Correct connector
Replace sensor
OK
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
106
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[4-way valve invert failure]
4-way valve operates normally.
(Check piping temperature at the
time of cooling/heating operation)
No
Yes
Temperature sensor check
TE sensor CN601
TS sensor CN600
Hydro TWO sensor
If defective, repair or replace it
4-way valve coil resistance
is 1.3 to 1.6 k .
No
Replace 4-way coil
NG
Check outdoor board
If defective, replace it
Yes
Outdoor control board operation
check (See below)
OK
4-way valve check
If defective, replace it
Outdoor control board operation check direction (Self-hold valve) = P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
1) With the dip switch SW804 set as in the table below, pressing SW801 for approx. 1 second
can check the operation of switching to cooling cycle or to heating cycle.
• The board are energized for 10 seconds.
• Take more than a minute for the next check because the parts (coil, resistance R700)
generate large heat. (This does not apply when no coil is connected.)
2) After the check, set all the SW804 dip switches to OFF.
Switching to cooling cycle
CN701
SW804 SW801
CN701
ON
Press
180DCV or higher
1
2
3
3
4
4
SW804 SW801
Switching to heating cycle
2
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
1
[P19]
Outdoor LED
indication
ON
Check code
Press
180DCV or higher
Note: Check with a tester
With an analog tester: If a tester shows 180DCV or higher, the board is good.
With digital tester:
Although values shown has some range, if its maximum value is
180DCV or higher, the board is good.
107
Check code
[P20]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Hi pressure protection operation]
Service valve is fully opened.
No
Open fully service valve
Yes
Heating season
Heating operation
Reset the power source and perform
a trail operation according to the season.
Cooling season
Cooling operation
Outdoor PD sensor is normal.
(confirmation by remote controller)
No
Replace sensor
Yes
Outdoor fan is free from crack
or looseness.
No
Check outdoor fan
If defective, replace or tighten it
No
Check the same item as
those for [P22] abnormality
Yes
Outdoor fan operates normally.
Yes
Something prevents outdoor unit
Yes
heat exchange
- Clogged heat exchanger
- short circuit
Remove the disturbing
element
No
Check for refrigerant overcharged, clogged
cycle, pipe break, abnormal overload, etc.
If defective, repair defective portion
Something prevents heat
exchange of hydro unit.
- Clogged filter
- Clogged heat exchanger
- Short circuit
No
Check for refrigerant overcharged, clogged
cycle, pipe break, abnormal overload, etc.
If defective, repair defective portion
108
Yes
Remove the
disturbing element
Check code
[P22]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Blower system failure]
Power voltage is normal
(AC220-230 V±10 %: single phase)
No
Check wiring
Request power source repair
Yes
When not energized, the fan motor
can be smoothly rotated by hand.
Fan motor coil resistance is normal.
Between red - white leads 12 -20
Between white - black leads 12 - 20
Between black - red leads 12 - 20
No
Replace fan motor
Yes
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
Outdoor fan sole operation check
1) With the dip switch SW804 set as in the table below, pressing SW801 for approx. 1 second
can check the outdoor fan sole operation. Perform this check to determine which of upper or
lower fan has a problem.
• When SW801 is pressed again for 1 second or when 2 minutes has passed, the fan stops.
2) After the check, set all the SW804 dip switches to OFF.
Outdoor fan sole operation
SW801
[P26]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Press
[Compressor drive element shorted out]
The connection between compressor
lead and reactor is correct.
(Check with wiring diagram)
No
Correct wiring
Yes
A operation without compressor lead
does not cause the same problem.
No
Yes
Compressor check
(rare short circuit, etc.)
If defective, replace it
[P29]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[Position detection circuit failure]
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
109
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
(MCC-1571)
Replace outdoor board
Outdoor LED
indication
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
No code
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[Discharge abnormality] Compressor's loss of synchronism due to rapid load change, etc.
* Although the outdoor LED indicates abnormality, the compressor restarts and no abnormality
is confirmed.
* This may occur due to the open phase of the compressor or wiring detach.
[F04]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[Discharge temperature sensor (TD) failure]
Check code
TD sensor connector
(CN603) is connected
No
Correct TD sensor
connection
Yes
TD sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
[F06]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
Replace TD sensor
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[Heat exchanger temperature sensor (TE) failure]
TE sensor connector (CN601)
is connected
No
Correct TE sensor
connection
Yes
TE sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
[F07]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
Replace TE sensor
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[Heat exchanger temperature sensor (TL) failure]
TL sensor connector (CN604)
is connected
No
Correct TL sensor
connection
YES
TL sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
YES
Replace outdoor control board
110
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
Replace TL sensor
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
Check code
[F08]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[Outside air temperature sensor (TO) failure]
TO sensor connector (CN602)
is connected
Yes
TO sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
[F12]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
No
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
Correct TO sensor
connection
Replace TO sensor
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[Suction temperature sensor (TS) failure]
TS sensor connector
(CN600) is connected
No
Correct TS sensor
connection
Yes
TS sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
No
Replace TS sensor
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
[F13]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[Heat sink temperature sensor (TH) failure]
Replace outdoor control board
[F15]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
[Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) wrong wiring]
TE and TS sensor is
attached to the correct position.
No
Correct sensor attaching
position
Yes
TE sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
Yes
TS sensor resistance
characteristic is normal
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
111
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
No
See the
characteristic table
on page 92
Replace TE sensor
Replace TS sensor
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
Check code
[F24]
Outdoor LED
indication
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
Check and Action procedure
(No specific description indicates outdoor unit parts.)
[High pressure sensor (PD) failure]
PD sensor connector (CN606)
is connected
Yes
No
No
PD sensor is normal
Correct PD sensor
connection
Replace PD sensor
Yes
Replace outdoor control board
[F31]
<Indication 1> <Indication 2>
[EEPROM failure]
Check outdoor control board
If defective, replace it
112
PC board
P805HR-E, P1105HR-E (MCC-1571)
9-4-3. Temperature sensor, temperature-resistance characteristic
table
TC, TWI, TWO, TFI, TTW, TE, TS, TO sensors
TD, TL sensors
Typical value
Temperature
(°C)
Typical value
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum)
(Standard)
(Maximum)
-10
55.42
55.73
60.04
0
32.33
33.80
10
19.63
20
Resistance value (kΩ)
Temperature
(°C)
(Minimum)
(Standard)
(Maximum)
0
150.5
161.3
172.7
35.30
10
92.76
99.05
105.6
20.35
21.09
20
58.61
62.36
66.26
12.23
12.59
12.95
25
47.01
49.93
52.97
25
9.75
10.00
10.25
30
37.93
40.22
42.59
30
7.764
7.990
8.218
40
25.12
26.55
28.03
40
5.013
5.192
5.375
50
17.00
17.92
18.86
50
3.312
3.451
3.594
60
11.74
12.34
12.95
60
2.236
2.343
2.454
70
8.269
8.668
9.074
70
1.540
1.623
1.709
80
5.925
6.195
6.470
80
1.082
1.146
1.213
90
4.321
4.507
4.696
90
0.7740
0.8237
0.8761
100
3.205
3.336
3.468
100
0.5634
0.6023
0.6434
TC, TWI, TWO, TFI, TTW, TE, TS, TO sensors
60
Resistance (k
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
Temperature (°C)
60
70
80
90
100
20
150
15
100
10
50
5
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Temperature (°C)
70
80
90
100
* Since the TH sensor (outdoor unit heat-sink temperature sensor) is built in the
outdoor control board, the resistance value cannot be measured.
113
Resistance (k) (50 °C or higher)
Resistance (k) (50 °C or lower)
TD, TL sensors
200
9-5. Operation check by PC board switch
9-5-1. Operation check mode
This mode allows to check the operations of the water 2-way valve, water 3-way valve, mixing valve, and circulation
pump. This operation is valid when the hydro unit and the outdoor unit are turned on the power.
Operation check mode
(1) Preparation
1) Turn all of the remote controllers "OFF" for the hot water supply and heating.
2) Turn off the hydro unit and the outdoor unit.
3) Remove the front panel of the hydro unit.
4) Set SW06_2 "ON".
(2) Operation check
1) Turn on the hydro unit and the outdoor unit.
2) Rotate switch DIP SW01 to position "1" and press tactile switch SW07 for 5 sec. or longer.
3) Rotating the rotary SW01 allows to check each operation.
4) Set the DIP SW06_2 "OFF" to finish.
Rotary
switch
1
2
3
Check contents
Remark
None
2WV_W
Alive for approx. 2 sec, not alive for 3
sec
3WV_W
Mixing valve
Alive for 30 sec in the forward direction
Alive for 30 sec in the reverse direction
5
Built-in circulation pump
Alive / not alive for 20 sec
6
External circulation pump 1
Alive / not alive for 20 sec
7
(External circulation pump 2)
Alive / not alive for 20 sec
Reserved
8
Water heat exchange backup
heater
Repeat heater 1, heater 2, and OFF
every 20 sec
The built-in circulation pump operates.
9
Hot water cylinder heater
Alive / not alive for 10 sec
Backup heater
Alive / not alive for 10 sec
11
Check the alarm output.
Output for 10 sec / no output for 10 sec
12
Check the boiler output.
Output for 10 sec / no output for 10 sec
13
Check the defrost output.
Output for 10 sec / no output for 10 sec
14
Check the operation output.
Output for 10 sec / no output for 10 sec
15
None
16
Built-in circulation pump
continuous operation
4
10
Continuously alive
114
The built-in circulation pump and external
circulation pump operate.
Do not operate the circulation pump alive
continuously without any water in hydro unit.
9-6. Brief method for checking the key components
9-6-1. Hydro unit
No.
1
Component name
Water heat exchange
temperature
(TC) sensor
Water inlet temperature
(TWI) sensor
Water outlet temperature
(TWO) sensor
Hot water cylinder temperature
(TTW) sensor
Floor inlet temperature
(TFI) sensor
Check procedure
Remove the connector and measure the resistance value with a tester. (Normal temperature)
Temperature
Sensor
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
33.8
kΩ
20.35
kΩ
12.59
kΩ
7.99
kΩ
Water heat exchange temperature (TC) sensor
Water inlet temperature (TWI) sensor
Water outlet (TWO) sensor
Hot water cylinder temperature (TTW) sensor
Floor inlet temperature (TFI) sensor
115
9-6-2. Outdoor unit
No.
Component name
Compressor
Type
DA422A3F-26M
Check procedure
Measure the resistance value of each winding with a tester.
Red
1
Location
Resistance
value
Red − White
1.04-1.16 Ω
White − Black
1.04-1.16 Ω
Black − Red
White
Outdoor fan motor
Type
ICF-280-A100-1
Black
Measure the resistance value of each winding with a tester.
Red
Location
Resistance value
− White
White − Black
Black − Red
Red
2
White
14.8 ± 1.5 Ω
Black
3
4-way valve coil
Type
STF-H01AP1874A1
Measure the resistance value.
1617 Ω ± 113 Ω
4
2-way valve coil
Type
VPV-MOAJ510B0
Measure the resistance value.
1435 Ω ± 144 Ω
Pulse motor valve coil
Type
UKV-A038
1.04-1.16 Ω At 20 °C
1 Black
M
6 Grey
Resistance
value
Location
3 Red
Grey − Black, Red
5
Grey − Yellow, Orange
43-49 Ω
43-49 Ω
Condition 20 °C
Yellow Grey Orange
2
6
4
Suction temperature (TS) sensor Remove the connector and measure the resistance value with a tester.
10-20 kΩ (Normal temperature)
Heat exchange temperature
(TE) sensor
Temperature
Outdoor temperature (TO)
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
Sensor (kΩ)
sensor
Outdoor heat exchange temperature sensor (TE)
33.8
20.4
12.6
Suction temperature sensor (TS)
Discharge temperature (TD)
sensor
7
6
30 °C
8.0
Remove the connector and measure the resistance value with a tester.
Temperature
Sensor (kΩ)
Discharge temperature sensor (TD)
116
0 °C
10 °C
20 °C
30 °C
161.3
99.0
62.4
40.2
10 Hydro unit and outdoor unit settings
Hydro unit
1. Hydro unit Setting
1-1. Setting switch names and positions
SW01
SW12
SW13
SW02
SW10
SW11
SW07
SW06
1-2. SW02 (System switching 1)
SW02
02_1
02_2
02_3
02_4
Switching details
Factory default
Boiler install position After 3WV heating side / Before 3WV
–
External cylinder thermostat connected.
External room thermostat connected.
After 3WV,
heating
–
No
No
OFF
Remarks
Before 3 WV
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-3. SW10 (Pump switching)
SW10
10_1
10_2
10_3
10_4
Switching details
Factory default
Pump P1 operation during hot water mode
OFF = P1 ON during heat pump activate
ON = P1 Continuous run
Pump P1 operation during room heating. P1 pump stop or
not using outside air temperature.
OFF = Continuous run
ON = Pump P1 stop when TO>20 oC (Available to change
the temperature setting by FC 9E)
Synchronization of Pump P1 and P2.
Pump P1 ON/OFF cycling (During long periods of system
OFF)
Heat-pump
activate
OFF
Continuous run
OFF
Non-synchronous
OFF
No
OFF
Remarks
1-4. SW11 (Heater Yes/No switching)
SW11
11_1
11_2
11_3
11_4
Switching details
Factory default
Hydro unit backup heater Energized Yes/No
Hot water cylinder heater Energized Yes/No
External booster heater output Enabled Yes/No
–
Energized
Energized
Enabled
–
Remarks
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-5. SW12 (System switching 2)
SW12
12_1
12_2
12_3
12_4
Switching details
Factory default
Hot water supply is using
ZONE1 operation is using
ZONE2 operation is using
–
Yes
Yes
No
–
117
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Remarks
1-6. SW13 (System switching 3)
SW13
13_1
13_2
13_3
13_4
Switching details
Factory default
3WV SPST/SPSD Specification switching
Boiler output enabled
Auto Restart of power outage after system power failure.
–
SPST
No
Yes
–
Remarks
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2. Function Code Setting
• Hydro unit function code setting is available only for the header remote controller.
• Set function codes for various operation modes with the remote controller.
2-1. How to set hydro unit function code
<Procedure> Perform the following when no operation is in progress.
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “FC for Hydro unit” on
the FIELD SETTING screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(2/2)
FC for Hydro unit
FC for Remote controller
SET
3
Press the [ ] / [
the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press
] button to set the value.
FC for Hydro unit
FC No.
Data
0001
FIX
4
Press the [
] button. The set value is registered.
118
2-2. How to set remote controller function code
<Procedure> Perform the following when no operation is in progress.
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “FC for Remote
controller” on the FIELD SETTING screen, then press the [
button.
]
FIELD SETTING MENU(2/2)
FC for Hydro unit
FC for Remote controller
SET
3
Press the [ ] / [
the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press
] button to set the value.
FC for Remote controller
FC No.
Data
0000
FIX
4
Press the [
] button. The set value is registered.
119
Function code table
FC
Item
Details
Factory default
01
Water heat exchanger capacity *1
0012: P805XWH**-E
0015: P1105XWH**-E
Depends on type
02
Cooling/Non-cooling switching
0000: Cooling
0001: Not cooling
0000: Cooling
08
Hot water boost operation time (operating time)
0003: 30 min
-
0018: 180 min
0006: 60 min
09
Hot water boost set temperature
0040: 40 °C
-
0080: 80 °C
0075: 75 °C
0A
Anti bacteria set temperature
0065: 65 °C
-
0080: 80 °C
0075: 75 °C
0B
Anti bacteria holding time
0000: 0 min
-
0060: 60 min
0030: 30 min
0C
Mixing valve drive time
0003: 30 sec
-
0024: 240 sec
0006: 60 sec
0F
Hot water HP allowance while cooling + hot water
supply
0000: Not allow
-
0001: Allow
0000: Not allow
18
Upper limit of cooling set temperature
0018: 18 °C
-
0030: 30 °C
0025: 25 °C
19
Lower limit of cooling set temperature
0007: 7 °C
-
0018: 20 °C
0007: 7 °C
1A
Upper limit of heating (ZONE1) set temperature
0037: 37 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0060: 60 °C
1B
Lower limit of heating (ZONE1) set temperature
0020: 20 °C
-
0037: 37 °C
0020: 20 °C
1C
Upper limit of heating (ZONE2) set temperature
0037: 37 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0060: 60 °C
1D
Lower limit of heating (ZONE2) set temperature
0020: 20 °C
-
0037: 37 °C
0020: 20 °C
1E
Upper limit of hot water set temperature
0060: 60 °C
-
0080: 80 °C
0075: 75 °C
1F
Lower limit of hot water set temperature
0040: 40 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0040: 40 °C
20
Hot water HP start temperature
0020: 20 °C
-
0045: 45 °C
0038: 38 °C
21
Hot water HP stop temperature
0040: 40 °C
-
0050: 50 °C
0045: 45 °C
22
Priority mode Hot water supply/Heating switching
temperature
-0020: -20 °C
-
0020: 20 °C
0000: 0 °C
23
Boiler output enable switching temperature
-0020: -20 °C
-
0020: 20 °C
-0010: -10 °C
24
Outside air temperature for hot water temperature
compensation start
-0020: -20 °C
-
0010: 10 °C
0000: 0 °C
25
Hot water temperature compensation value
0000: 0K
-
0015: 15K
0003: 3K
26
Night setback change temperature range
0003: 3K
-
0020: 20K
0005: 5K
27
Set temperature shift with heating Auto
-0005: -5K
-
0005: 5K
0000: 0K
29
Outside air temperature T1 temperature
-0015: -15 °C
-
0000: 0 °C
-0010: -10 °C
2B
Outside air temperature T3 temperature
0000: 0 °C
-
0015: 15 °C
0010: 10 °C
2C
Set temperature A with outside air temperature of T0
0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0040: 40 °C
2D
Set temperature B with outside air temperature of T1
0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0035: 35 °C
2E
Set temperature C with outside air temperature of 0 °C 0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0030: 30 °C
2F
Set temperature D with outside air temperature of T3
0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0025: 25 °C
30
Set temperature E with outside air temperature of 20 °C 0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0020: 20 °C
-
31
Zone2 ratio with Zone1 as Auto
0000: 0%
0100: 100%
0080: 80%
33
Hydro unit backup heater down time
0000: 5 min
0002: 15 min
0001: 10 min
0003: 20 min
0001: 10 min
34
Hydro unit backup heater up time
0000: 10 min
0002: 30 min
0001: 20 min
0003: 40 min
0000: 10 min
3A
Frost protection function Invalid/Valid
0000: Invalid
3B
Frost protection set temperature
0008: 8 °C
3C
2-way valve operation (logical reverse) control
0000: Energised during cooling
0001: Not energised during cooling
0000: Activate during
cooling
3E
Heating HP/Boiler priority switching when using boiler
0000: Priority on HP
0001: Priority on boiler
0000: Priority on HP
40
Activate/deactivate room temperature control
0000: Deactivate
0001: Activate
0000: Deactivate
-
0001: Valid
0001: Valid
0020: 20 °C
0015: 15 °C
*1 FC_01 is needed for PCB replacement or function code reset procedure has been completed.
*2 System restart with remote controller.
*3 Restart in the mode when stopping.
*4 In addition, it is enable only when switch 2-3 is set to “OFF” and FC61 is set to “3”.
120
FC
Item
Details
Factory default
52
External input contact logic (must be used in with
FC61)
0000: CLOSE to stop system *2
0000:CLOSE to stop
0001: OPEN to stop system *2
0002: OPEN to stop system, CLOSE to restart
system (Statics input)
0003: CLOSE to stop system, CLOSE again to restart
system (plus input)
54
Logic of 3-way valve’s action when powered (Single
return only)
0000: Not reversed (Hot water mode when powered) 0000: Not reversed
0001: Reversed (Heating when powered)
(Hot water mode when
powered)
58
Night setback is activated
0000: Zone 1 & 2
0001: Zone 1 only
0000: Zone1 & 2
59
Interval of Mixing Valve control
0001: 1 minute
5A
P1 setting while in hot water supply mode
0000: While running HP only
0001: P1 continues running
-
0000: While running
HP only
5B
Boiler running setting
0000: Boiler and HP
0001: Boiler only with pump running
0002: Heater
0003: Boiler only (Pump stopping)
0003: Boiler only
61
Changing the target of stopping/starting by external
signal or changing the TEMPO setting
0000: Hot water supply and heating
0000: Hot water
0001: Keeping initial status *3
supply and heating
0002: Hot water supply only
0003: Heating only
0004: TEMPO1 (Not activate the heaters)
0005: TEMPO2 (Not activate the heaters, inlet pump,
heat pump)
62
Activate/deactivate A02 error detection
0000: Activate
0001: Deactivate
0000: Activate
64
Continuously run or stop the P2 pump while cooling
0000: Continuously run P2
0001: Stop P2
0000: Continuous
running
65
P1 pump setting when the thermostat is deactivated in
the room temperature remote controller and room
temperature thermostat settings
0000: Continuously run P1
0001: Stop P1 when the thermostat is OFF
0000: Continuous
running
67
Changing the condition of optional output (For the
optional PC board connected to CN209)
0000: 1-3 During defrosting
2-3 While compressor is running.
0001: 1-3 As error is detected
2-3 During operation
0000: 1-3 During
defrosting
2-3 While compressor
is running.
6E
To diff temperature, when pump P1 stop at to 20 °C
0001: 1K
0005: 5K
0002: 2K
73
Hot water tank heater start time of heat-pump while
operating
0000: 30 min passed
0003: 120 min passed
0000: 30 min passed
92
Upper room temperature limit when cooling
0000: 0 °C
-
0055: 55 °C
0029: 29 °C
93
Lower room temperature limit when cooling
0000: 0 °C
-
0055: 55 °C
0018: 18 °C
94
Upper room temperature limit when heating
0000: 0 °C
-
0055: 55 °C
0029: 29 °C
95
Lower room temperature limit when heating
0000: 0 °C
-
0055: 55 °C
0018: 18 °C
96
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
0005: 5 °C
cooling by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat
-
0030: 30 °C
0020: 20 °C
9D
Initial water temperature setting when controlling
0020: 20 °C
heating by the room temperature remote controller and
room temperature thermostat
-
0060: 60 °C
0040: 40 °C
9E
TO temperature setting to stop the P1 pump during the 0010: 10 °C
middle period heating
-
0030: 30 °C
0020: 20 °C
A0
P1 pump speed control changes the percentage duty of 0000: 100%
the PWM control
0005: 50%
0000: 100%
A1
Outside air temperature T0 temperature
-0030: -30 °C
-0020: -20 °C
-0020: -20 °C
A2
Zone2 temperature setting method
0000: Percentage (FC31)
0001: Fixed value (FCA3~ A5)
0000: Percentage
A3
Set temperature A' with outside temperature of T0
0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0040: 40 °C
A4
Set temperature B' with outside temperature of T1
0020: 20 °C
-
0060: 60 °C
0035: 35 °C
-
0030: 30 minutes
*1 FC_01 is needed for PCB replacement or function code reset procedure has been completed.
*2 System restart with remote controller.
*3 Restart in the mode when stopping.
*4 In addition, it is enable only when switch 2-3 is set to “OFF” and FC61 is set to “3”.
121
0004: 4 minutes
FC
Item
Details
-
Factory default
A5
Set temperature E' with outside temperature of 20 °C
0020: 20 °C
B2
HP restart water temperature in A zone. (Valid only
room temp control using 2nd remote controller)
0020: 20 °C
0060: 60 °C
0020: 20 °C
0037: 37 °C
0025: 25 °C
B5
Initial water temperature setting method when
controlling heating by the room temperature remote
controller and room temperature thermostat
0000: The fixed temperature by FC9D
0001: The calculated temperature by Auto curve
0000: The fixed
B6
Changing the target of stopping / starting by external
signal (CN210 - terminal 2 and 3)
0000: none (Local hot water tank thermostat)
0001: Hot water supply control *4
0000: none
B8
Forcibly heater off at T0 ≥ A °C
0000: no restriction, 0001: 20 °C
0002: 15 °C, ···, 0006: -5 °C
0000: no restriction
B9
Backup heater energization temperature during
defrosting.
Correction coefficient B
0000: 0K, ···, 0004: 40K
0000: 0K
BA
Intermittent operation at T0 ≥ A °C
(heating mode)
0000: continuous operation
0001: 20 °C, ···, 0006: -5 °C
0000: continuous
operation
BB
Intermittent operation at T0 < B °C
(cooling mode)
0000: continuous operation
0001: 35 °C, ···, 0003: 25 °C
0000: continuous
operation
BC
Pump off time during thermostat off operation
0000: 5 min, ···, 0005: 30 min
0001: 10 min
*1 FC_01 is needed for PCB replacement or function code reset procedure has been completed.
*2 System restart with remote controller.
*3 Restart in the mode when stopping.
*4 In addition, it is enable only when switch 2-3 is set to “OFF” and FC61 is set to “3”.
Remote controller function code table
FC
Item
Details
Fist shipment
02
Temperature correction by the room temperature sensor -10K~+10K: By 1K steps
(heating)
-1: -1K correction
03
Temperature correction by the room temperature sensor -10K~+10K: By 1K steps
(cooling)
-1: -1K correction
05
24H/12H display switching
0: 24H display
1: 12H (AM/PM) display
0: 24H display
1: Valid
0: Invalid
09
Night time low-noise mode
0: Invalid
0A
Night time low-noise start time
0 - 23 (0:00 to 23:00)
22: 22:00
0B
Night time low-noise end time
0 - 23 (0:00 to 23:00)
06: 06:00
0C
Anti bacteria start time
0 - 23 (0:00 to 23:00)
22: 22:00
0D
Anti bacteria start cycle
1 - 10 (Every day to 10-day cycle)
07: 7-day cycle
0E
Starting time of Night setback
0 - 23 (0:00 to 23:00)
22: 22:00
0F
Ending time of Night setback
0 - 23 (0:00 to 23:00)
11
Remote controller Alarm Tone.
0: Alarm Tone OFF
06: 06:00
1: Alarm Tone ON
1: Alarm Tone ON
12
Frost running period (days)
(0 days – 20 days)
00: No setting
13
Frost running period (hours)
(0 hours – 23 hours)
00: No setting
14
Start and End temperature
20 - 55 (20 °C - 55 °C)
00: No setting
15
Max temperature
20 - 55 (20 °C - 55 °C)
16
Continuation days for every step up to Max temperature 1 - 7 (1 day - 7 days)
00: No setting
17
Temperature difference for every step up to Max
temperature
1 - 10 (1 K - 10 K)
00: No setting
18
Continuation days for every step down to End
temperature
1 - 7 (1 day - 7 days)
00: No setting
19
Temperature difference for every step down to End
temperature
1 - 10 (1 K - 10 K)
00: No setting
1A
Continuation days in Max temperature
1 - 30 (1 day - 30 days)
00: No setting
*14~1A: for floor drying function
122
00: No setting
2-3. How to reset hydro function code
If the hydro unit PCB has been replaced, it is necessary to change the FC 01 (capacity setting)
(1) Preparation
1) Turn all off the Hot water supply operation and Heating/Cooling operation.
2) Turn off the power supply of the hydro unit and the outdoor unit.
3) Remove the front panel of the hydro unit and cover to the hydro unit electrical box.
4) Set SW06_1 and _2 "ON".
(2) Procedure
1) Turn on the power supply of the hydro unit and the outdoor unit.
• The small yellow LED located near the MCU should be flashing slowly.
2) Press tactile switch SW07 until the yellow LED turns off.
• When the tactile switch SW07 has been press for 5 sec, flashing becomes quickly. And when the
switch will be pressed further 5 sec, the yellow LED will turn off.
When the SW07 is released, the yellow LED start to flash quickly again.
3) Turn off the power supply of the hydro unit and the outdoor unit.
4) Set SW06_1 and _2 to "OFF".
5) Replace the electrical box cover and front panel on the hydro unit.
Yellow LED
SW06
And you can reset hydro function code on remote
controller.
Press the [
][
][
] long time in
“FC for Hydro unit” display, and select “YES”.
SW07
2-4. How to reset remote controller function code
You can reset remote controller function code on remote controller.
][
][
] long time in “FC for remote controller” display, and select “YES”.
Press the [
123
3. Test run
• Even if the outside air temperature or water temperature is outside the setting value range, Heating, Cooling and
Hot water supply operation become possible.
• Since the protection setting is disabled in the TEST mode, do not continue a test run longer than 10 minutes.
<Procedure>
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Test mode” on the
FIELD SETTING MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(1/2)
Test mode
Floor drying
Forced defrosting
Information input
Alarm history
SET
3
Press the [
] button to select ON, then press the [
The
mark appears on the top screen.
] button.
Test mode
ON
OFF
FIX
4
Start the heating or cooling or Hot water operation on the top
screen, then the selected mode mark is blinking during Test mode.
MON
ZONE1
HEAT/COOL
ZONE2
HOT WATER
HOT WATER
• The pump is activated in 30 seconds. If air is not released completely, the flow rate switch is activated to stop
operation. Release air again according to the piping procedure. Little air entrainment is discharged from the
purge valve.
• Check that the hydraulic pressure has become the predetermined pressure 0.1 to 0.2 MPa (1 to 2 bar). If the
hydraulic pressure is insufficient, replenish water.
• Heating operation starts. Check that the hydro unit starts heating.
• Press the [
] button to select the Cooling operation, in a few second, the operation starts.
• Check that the hydro unit starts cooling and that the floor heating system is not cooled.
• Press the [
] button to stop the operation.
• Press the [
] button to start the Hot water supply operation.
• Check that there is no air entrainment.
• Check that hot water is present at the connection port of the hot water cylinder.
• Press the [
] button or [
ON/OFF] button to stop the operation.
124
4. Auto Curve Setting
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
• Set function codes for various operation modes with the remote controller.
<Procedure> Perform the following when no operation is in progress.
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “FC for Hydro unit” on
the FIELD SETTING screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(2/2)
FC for Hydro unit
FC for Remote controller
SET
3
Press the [ ] / [
the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press
] button to set the value.
FC for Hydro unit
FC No.
Data
0001
FIX
4
Press the [
] button. The set value is registered.
125
<ZONE1>
• An operation starts at the set temperature of straight -line approximation for the following: water temperature A °C with the outside
temperature T0 °C, B °C with T1 °C, C °C with T2 °C, D °C with T3 °C, and E °C with 20 °C.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
2C
Setting temperature A at T0
2D
Setting temperature B at T1
2E
Setting temperature C at T2(= 0 °C)
2F
Setting temperature D at T3
30
Setting temperature E at 20 °C
A1
Outside temperature T0
29
Outside temperature T1
2B
Outside temperature T3
Set temperature shift with heating set to auto
27
TSC_F (°C)
± 5K adjustable (FC 27)
A(40)
B(35)
C(30)
D(25)
E(20)
T0
(-20)
T1
(-10)
T2=0
T3
(10)
20 TO (°C)
Default
40
35
30
25
20
-20
-10
10
0
range
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
-30~-20 °C
-15~0 °C
0~15 °C
-5 to 5K
<ZONE2>
• Set temperature of the ZONE2 can be selected from two methods (FC_A2). One is a percentage of ZONE1, the other is a fixed value.
FC_A2 = "0" : Percentage method that is set by FC_31.
FC_A2 = "1" : Fixed value method that is set by FC_A3, A4 and A5.
However, it is automatically controlled the set temperature of ZONE1 to be the ZONE2 or more.
FC_A2=0 Percentage method
FC_A2=1 Fixed value method
TSC_F(°C)
TSC_F(°C)
ZONE 1
A(40)
A'(40)
ZONE 2
80 % (FC_31) of ZONE1
B(35)
B'(35)
C(30)
D(25)
E'(20)
E(20)
T0
(-20)
T1
(-10)
T2=0
T3
(10)
Auto-Curve in ZONE2 shows 80% (FC) of that of ZONE1, the
water temperature setting does not fall below 20 °C.
Related FC
FC No.
Setting item
A2
The choice of how to set ZONE2
A3
Setting temperature A' at T0
A4
Setting temperature B' at T1
A5
Setting temperature E' at 20 °C
31
Auto-Curve ratio of ZONE2
T0
(-20)
20 TO (°C)
Default
0
40
35
20
80
T1
(-10)
20 TO (°C)
The ZONE2 set temperature A' °C with the outside
temperature T0 °C, B' °C with T1 °C, E' °C with 20 °C.
range
0 or 1
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
20~60 °C
0~100%
126
Auto-Curve temperature shift
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
• The set temperature can be shifted in the range of ±5K of the current setting.
1
Press the [
screen.
]/[
] button to select “Auto mode” on the MENU
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [ ] button for 4 seconds or longer to enter the setting mode. The function code setting
screen appears.
FC No. 27: Shifted temperature (Range: -5 ~ +5, Default: 0)
3
Press the [
] button to select Data value, then press the [
temperature between -5K to +5 K.
4
Press the [
]/[
] button to adjust the
] button. The set temperature is registered.
Auto mode
FC No.
FIX
127
Data
5. Clock Setting
• Setting for the clock (date, month, year, time)
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Setting” on the MENU
screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Initial setting” on the
Setting screen, then press the [
] button.
Setting
Initial setting
Schedule setting
SET
3
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Clock” on the Initial
setting screen, then press the [
] button.
Initial setting(1/2)
Clock
Screen contrast
Backlight
Header / Second
Temperature control
SET
4
5
Press the [
Press the [
[
] button.
]/[
]/[
] button to select the date, month, year, and, time.
] button to set the value, then press the
Clock
• The clock display appears on the top screen.
• The clock display blinks if the clock setting has been reset due to power
failure or other cause.
31 / 12 / 2016 01:11
FIX
←
128
→
6. Scheduled Operation Setting
6-1. How to set scheduled operation
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
• Schedule setting makes the following modes to be flexibly set: hot water supply, heating, cooling, hot water
supply and heating, hot water supply and cooling, and stop, and set temperature.
• Set the unit clock and the schedule condition setting before schedule timer setting.
<Preparation>
Set the remote controller time at first.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Setting” on the MENU
screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Schedule setting” on
the setting screen, then press the [
] button.
Setting
Initial setting
Schedule setting
SET
Condition setting
• Up to 6 different running patterns per day can be programmed.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Condition setting” on the
Schedule setting screen, then press the [
] button.
Schedule setting
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Key lock
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select the day, then press the [
to input running pattern.
] button
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode
Z1
Z2
HW
Start
End
----
----
----
----
-- : --- : --- : --
-- : --- : --- : --
COPY
DAY
3
Press [
]/[
] button to select the change item, then press the
[
]/[
] button.
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
COOL 25
HW
--
FIX
129
RESET
SET
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
08:00
22:00
--
--
23:00
--:--
--
65
18:00
19:00
RESET
4
Press the [
] button.
Condition setting
Schedule timer confirm?
YES
5
Press the [
] button to Fix.
Mode :Operation mode (HEAT, COOL, HW (Hot water))
Z1
:ZONE1 setting temperature
Z2
:ZONE2 setting temperature
HW
:Hot water supply operation setting temperature
Start :Operation start time (0:00 ~ 23:59)
End
:Operation end time (0:00 ~ 24:00, -- : --)
• “-- : --” means the operation continues.
If End time is set earlier than Start time, an error is displayed.
130
NO
To set up ranging over a day
There are two methods.
➀If “24:00” is set to “END” and “00:00” is set to “START” next day, the previous operation status will be continued.
And set the time you want to stop to “END”.
➁If “--” is set to “END”, the previous operation status will be continued next day. And set the time you want to stop
to “END”. Any “START” time is sufficient if it is earlier than “END” time.
In the case of heating operation from 21:00 of Monday night to 3:00 of Tuesday morning.
Example of set up (1)
Condition setting(1/2)
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
21:00
24:00
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
00:00
03:00
--
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
--
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
--
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
--
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
COPY
DAY
RESET
SET
COPY
DAY
RESET
SET
MON
TUE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
Heating
Example of set up (2)
Condition setting(1/2)
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
21:00
-- : --
-- : --
-- : --
--
-- : --
-- : --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
COPY
DAY
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
02:30
03:00
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
--
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
COPY
DAY
RESET
SET
*1
RESET
SET
MON
TUE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
Heating
Example of set up (3) (ALL DAY)
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
HEAT 55
--
--
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
21:00
24:00
45
--
00:00
03:00
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
RESET
SET
DAY
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
0
Heating
Example of set up (4) (ALL DAY)
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
HEAT 55
--
--
DAY
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
21:00
-- : --
45
--
02:30
03:00
--
--
-- : --
-- : --
*1
RESET
SET
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
0
Heating
*1: “START” time is permissible 00:00 ~ 02:59 in this example.
131
To copy the settings of the previous day
1
Press the [
] button to select the day, then press the [
to copy the settings of the previous day.
] button
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode
Z1
Z2
HW
Start
End
----
----
----
----
-- : --- : --- : --
-- : --- : --- : --
COPY
DAY
2
Press the [
] button, then the contents of the setting is displayed.
RESET
SET
Condition setting
Copy the previous day setting?
YES
NO
↓
• If the [
] button is pressed in the state where “MON” is selected, the
contents of the setting of “SUN” is copied.
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
COOL 25
HW
--
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
08:00
22:00
--
--
23:00
--:--
--
65
18:00
19:00
COPY
DAY
RESET
SET
To reset the settings for each day.
1
Press the [
] button to select the day, then press the [
to reset the settings of the day.
] button
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode Z1
HEAT 55
COOL 25
HW
--
Z2
HW
Start
End
45
--
08:00
22:00
--
--
23:00
--:--
--
65
18:00
19:00
COPY
DAY
2
Press the [
] button, then the contents of the setting is cleared.
RESET
SET
Condition setting
Delete the day setting?
YES
NO
↓
Condition setting(1/2)
ALL MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mode
Z1
Z2
HW
Start
End
----
----
----
----
-- : --- : --- : --
-- : --- : --- : --
COPY
DAY
132
RESET
SET
Holiday setting
• Set the days of the week when the schedule timer not used.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Holiday setting” on the
Schedule setting screen, then press the [
] button.
Schedule setting
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Key lock
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select the day, then press the [
to set.
●: Schedule timer is not used.
] button
Holiday setting
MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
FIX
DAY
3
Press the [
SET
] button to Fix.
Key lock
• Select whether to LOCK / UNLOCK [ON/OFF], [Temperature], [mode] during schedule timer.
1
Press the [
]/[
the [
] button.
2
Press the [
] button to select object, then press the [
to select LOCK or UNLOCK.
●: LOCK
] button to select “Key lock” on the Schedule setting screen, then press
] button
Key lock
ON/OFF
Temp.
FIX
SELECT
3
Press the [
Mode
LOCK
] button to Fix.
• When “LOCK” is selected, the key cannot be used during Key lock and schedule timer.
• The factory default is “UNLOCK”.
To enable the Schedule timer function
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Schedule timer” on the
MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Schedule timer
screen, then press the [
] button. The
mark appears on the
top screen.
Schedule timer
ON
OFF
FIX
133
7. Frost protection Setting
• This function performs operation with the minimum capacity (target water temperature:15°C) to prevent pipes
from freezing in case the unit is not used for a long period due to absence.
• Cancel schedule timer to start Frost protection operation. When Frost protection is operated with schedule timer
on, it may stop during its operation.
• The minimum capacity can be changed, ask the installation company to make the required changes to the
settings.
• This function takes precedence over the Night setback operation that is set separately.
• Start the heating operation before making the setting.
It may not be able to go to the setting screen immediately after start. In that case, select “Frost protection” again
after tens of seconds.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Frost protection” on the
MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Frost protection
screen, then press the [
] button.
Frost protection
ON
OFF
FIX
3
The temperature indication change to “F” and
the top screen.
mark appears on
• When the set period has passed, the Frost protection operation ends
automatically.
134
MON
ZONE1
HOT WATER
HEAT/COOL
HOT WATER
<How to set Frost protection operation end time>
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
1
Press the [
]/[
MENU screen.
] button to select “Frost protection” on the
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [ ] button for 4 seconds or longer to enter the setting mode. The function code setting
screen appears.
FC No. 12: End days (Range: 0~20, Default: 0)
13: End times (Range: 0~23, Default: 0)
ex)
Code No. 12: 05
13: 13 = 5 days 13 hours
3
Press the [
]/[
to set the value.
4
Press the [
] button to select FC number or Data, then press the [
]/[
] button. The set value is registered.
Frost protection
FC No.
FIX
135
] button
Data
8. NIGHT Operation Setting
• This function is used for energy saving during specified time zone (sleeping hours, etc.).
• For night time hours (sleeping hours, etc.), this function shifts the set temperature of heating or cooling by 5K.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select an “Night setback” on
the MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Night setback
screen, then press the [
] button.
Night setback
ON
OFF
FIX
3
Start the heating or cooling operation, then the
mark appears on the top screen.
<How to set NIGHT operation start and end time>
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
1
Press the [
]/[
the MENU screen.
] button to select an “Night setback” on
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [ ] button for 4 seconds or longer to enter the setting mode. The function code setting
screen appears.
FC No. 0E: Start time (Range: 0~23, Default: 22)
0F: End time (Range: 0~23, Default: 06)
3
Press the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press the [
set the value.
The same value cannot be set to 0E and 0F.
4
Press the [
]/[
] button. The set time is registered.
Night setback
FC No.
FIX
136
] button to
Data
9. Anti bacteria Setting
• This setting regularly raises the hot water cylinder temperature to prevent bacteria from growing.
• The Anti bacteria operation is performed to maintain the temperature (75°C) for the period (30 minutes) when
the preset start time (22:00) comes according to the preset cycle (7 days).
• The maintain temperature and the period can be changed, ask the installation company to make the required
changes to the settings.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Anti bacteria” on the
MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Anti bacteria screen,
then press the [
] button.
Anti bacteria
ON
OFF
FIX
3
Start the hot water operation, then the
mark appears on the top screen.
<How to set Anti bacteria temperature and holding time>
In FC_0A or 0B, the set temperature and holding time can be changed.
FC_0A: Set temperature change range 70 to 80 °C (75 °C: default)
FC_0B: Holding time change range 0 to 60 minutes (30 minutes: default)
<How to set Anti bacteria start time and cycle>
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
1
Press the [
MENU screen.
]/[
] button to select “Anti bacteria” on the
MENU(2/2)
Anti bacteria
Frost protection
Setting
Information
SET
2
Press the [ ] button for 4 seconds or longer to enter the setting mode. The function code setting
screen appears.
FC No. 0C: Start time (Range: 0~23, Default: 22)
0D: cycle (Range: 0~10, Default: 07)
3
Press the [
]/[
set the value.
4
Press the [
] button to select FC number or Data, then press the [
]/[
] button. The set value is registered.
Anti bacteria
FC No.
FIX
137
] button to
Data
10. Hot water boost Setting
• This function is used when temporarily giving priority to the hot water supply operation. The hot water supply
operation is performed in preference to other operations with a target of the preset time (60 minutes) or the preset
temperature (75°C). Use this function when hot water is not used for a long time or before using a large amount
of hot water.
• The preset time and temperature settings can be changed to values with in a range of 30 to 180 minutes and 40
to 80°C. Ask the installation company to make the required changes to the settings.
• Start the hot water operation before making the setting.
It may not be able to go to the setting screen immediately after start. In that case, select “Hot water boost” again
after tens of seconds.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Hot water boost” on the
MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Hot water boost
screen, then press the [
] button. The
mark appears on the
top screen.
• When the set time period has passed or the water temperature has
reached the set temperature, the Hot water boost operation ends
automatically.
Hot water boost
ON
OFF
FIX
Hot water boost operation with the heat pump and heater ends when the water temperature reaches 75 °C;
however, the normal hot water supply operation automatically starts after 60 minutes even if the temperature is not
as high as 75 °C.
<How to set Hot water boost operation time and temperature>
In FC_08 or 09, the operation time and set temperature can be changed.
FC_08: Operation time change range 30 to 120 minutes (60 minutes: default)
FC_09: Set temperature change range 40 to 80 °C (75 °C: default)
138
11. Night time Low-noise Setting
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
• This setting is used to reduce noise output, from the outdoor unit, during night time for neighbours. Night time
low-noise operates with lower operation frequency and fan tap than normal operation only for the set time period.
1
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Silent mode” on the
MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [
] button to select “ON” on the Silent mode screen,
then press the [
] button.
Silent mode
ON
OFF
FIX
3
Start the heating, cooling or hot water operation. The
the set-up time zone.
mark appears on the top screen during
<How to enable, set start time and end time of night time low-noise>
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
1
Press the [
MENU screen.
]/[
] button to select “Silent mode” on the
MENU(1/2)
Auto mode
Schedule timer
Night setback
Silent mode
Hot water boost
SET
2
Press the [ ] button for 4 seconds or longer to enter the setting mode. The function code setting
screen appears.
FC No. 0A: Start time (Range: 0~23, Default: 22)
0B: End time (Range: 0~23, Default: 06)
3
Press the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press the [
set the value.
The same value cannot be set to 0A and 0B.
4
Press the [
]/[
] button. The set time is registered.
Silent mode
FC No.
FIX
139
] button to
Data
12. Forced Defrosting Setting
• This function is available only for the header remote controller.
• This function can active the forced defrosting mode for the outdoor unit.
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Forced defrosting” on the
FIELD SETTING screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(1/2)
Test mode
Floor drying
Forced defrosting
Information input
Alarm history
SET
3
Press the [
] button to select ON, then press the [
] button.
Forced defrosting
ON
OFF
FIX
4
Start the heating operation on the top screen.
(Operation)
• Press the
button.
• Set the operation to the heating mode.
• After a while, forced defrosting signals are transmitted to the outdoor unit, and the unit starts defrosting.
(Forced defrosting lasts for up to 10 minutes.)
• After the defrosting, the heating operation starts.
• To perform defrosting again, start with 1 above.
(Performing the forced defrosting once cancels the forced defrosting setting above described.)
140
13. Display Function of Set Temperature and Other Settings
• The sensor sensing temperature is displayed on the remote controller.
• This function allows you to make sure whether the sensor is installed properly.
■ Sensor temperature display calling
<Procedure>
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Service monitor” on the
FIELD SETTING MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(2/2)
Service monitor
FC for Hydro unit
FC for Remote controller
SET
3
Press the [
] button to select the unit,
then press the [
] button to display
the status.
Service monitor
Service monitor
UNIT 1
UNIT 4
UNIT 7
UNIT 2
UNIT 5
UNIT 8
UNIT 3
UNIT 6
Code
RETURN
UNIT
141
SET
Data
Hydro unit data
Item code
00
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0
0F
Data name
Control temperature (Hot water cylinder)
Control temperature (Zone1)
Control temperature (Zone2)
Remote controller sensor temperature
Condensed temperature (TC)
Water inlet temperature (TWI)
Water outlet temperature (TWO)
Water heater outlet temperature (THO)
Floor inlet temperature (TFI)
Hot water cylinder temperature (TTW)
Mixing valve position
Low pressure (Ps) × 1/10
Hydro soft Ver.
Unit
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
step
kPa
‒
Outdoor unit data
Item code
60
61
62
63
65
6A
6D
70
72
73
74
Data name
Heat exchange temperature (TE)
Outside air temperature (TO)
Discharge temperature (TD)
Suction temperature (TS)
Heat sink temperature (THS)
Current × 10
Heat exchanger coil temperature (TL)
Compressor operation Hz
Number of revolutions of outdoor fan (lower or 1 fan model)
Number of revolutions of outdoor fan (upper)
Outdoor PMV position × 1/10
Unit
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
A
°C
Hz
rpm
rpm
pls
Service data
Item code
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Data name
Micro computer energized accumulation time × 1/100
Hot water compressor ON accumulation time × 1/100
Cooling compressor ON accumulation time × 1/100
Heating compressor ON accumulation time × 1/100
Built-in circulation pump operation accumulation time × 1/100
Hot water cylinder heater operation accumulation time × 1/100
Backup heater operation accumulation time × 1/100
Booster heater operation accumulation time × 1/100
Unit
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
• Some sensors (temperature / pressure) or fan are not displayed, because not connected.
142
14. Failure History Calling Function
• List of latest 10 alarm data: error information of error code, date and time is displayed.
<Procedure>
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Alarm history” on the
FIELD SETTING MENU screen, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(1/2)
Test mode
Floor drying
Forced defrosting
Information input
Alarm history
SET
To reset the alarm history
1
Press the [
] button to reset the alarm history.
Alarm history(1/3)
Code
Date
Time
RESET
2
Press the [
] button, then all alarm data is cleared.
Alarm history
Reset all alarm data?
YES
NO
NOTE
If the current failure is the same as the one occurred last time before deleted, the history may not record the current
failure.
143
15. Floor drying
•
•
•
•
•
This function is available only for the header remote controller.
This function is used for drying concrete etc.
Service personnel must operate the unit after setting the related function code.
Operation is not started unless All the related function codes are set.
Refer to the following for the settings of the related items. Please setup on the responsibility for an installer. An
unsuitable setup may cause a crack of concrete etc.
• When the operation starts, the unit operates as follows.
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select "Floor drying" on the
FIELD SETTING MENU, then press the [
] button for 4 seconds or
longer.
FIELD SETTING MENU(1/2)
Test mode
Floor drying
Forced defrosting
Information input
Alarm history
FC:14 setting start and End temperature [20-55°C]
FC:15 setting Max temperature [20-55°C]
FC:16 continuation days for every step up to Max temperature [1-7 days]
FC:17 temperature difference for every step up to Max temperature [1-10 K]
FC:18 continuation days for every step down to End temperature [1-7 days]
FC:19 temperature difference for every step down to End temperature [1-10 K]
FC:1A Continuation days in Max temperature [1-30 days]
SET
setting temperature
°C
50
49
48
47
46
FC:15 45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
FC:14 30
29
28
27
26
25
24
:
:
1
0
FC:1A
FC:19
FC:18
FC:17
FC:16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
lapsed days
total days
3
Press the [ ] / [
the [
]/[
] button to select FC number or Data, then press
] button to set the value.
Floor drying
FC No.
FIX
4
Press the [
] button. The set value is registered.
144
Data
22 Day
To start the operation
1
Press the [
] button and the [
] button at same time for 4
seconds or longer on the top screen to display the “FIELD SETTING
MENU”.
2
Press the [
]/[
] button to select “Floor drying” on the
FIELD SETTING MENU, then press the [
] button.
FIELD SETTING MENU(1/2)
Test mode
Floor drying
Forced defrosting
Information input
Alarm history
SET
3
Press the [
button.
] button to select the ON, then press the [
• Check the total days for Floor drying operation, then press [
The
mark and
mark appears on the Top screen.
]
Floor drying
] button.
ON
OFF
FIX
4
Start the heating operation on the top screen.
• Then ZONE1 mark blinks during Floor drying operation and lapsed days
are displayed.
MON
ZONE1
HOT WATER
HEAT/COOL
HOT WATER
• If some abnormalities occur during Floor drying operation, the System stops and Alarm history screen is
displayed.
• After heating operation is stopped by operating the remote controller during Floor drying operation, if heating
operation is again started within 30 minutes, Floor drying operation is started from the time of stopping.
145
Outdoor unit
16. Outdoor Unit Setting
16-1. Refrigerant recovery control
Although HFC refrigerant is "Ozone depletion potential = 0", emission control is applied to it as a greenhouse effect
gas.
This model has a switch for the outdoor unit to perform an environment-friendly refrigerant recovery operation
(pump down) when the model is replaced or discarded.
[How to operate]
1
<HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E>
Remove the water in the hydro unit.
(With the water remained in the hydro unit, performing
refrigerant recovery may freeze the water and burst the
unit.) *1
4
3
2
1
Set all the SW804 dip switches to OFF (initial status),
and press the push-button switch SW801 for approx.
1 second.
SW801 Press for
approx. 1 sec
ON
2
SW804 All OFF (Initial status)
SW805 (Green LED) blinks.
A cooling operation starts. (During the operation, D805
(green LED) blinks.
Note that this operation lasts for 10 minutes.
4
3
1
2
ON
Press again the push-button switch SW801 for
approx. 1 second. The outdoor unit stops operation (cooling).
4
5
3
After the refrigerant recovery is completed, close the
gas-side valve.
2
4
1
After 3 minutes has passed, close the liquid-side
valve.
ON
3
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
*1 : If can not remove the water
Operate the circulation pump, to prevent freezing.
1.Turn off the power. (hydro and outdoor unit)
2.Set SW06-2 “ON”.
3.Turn on the power. (hydro and outdoor unit)
4.Rotate switch SW01 to position “1” and press tactile switch SW07 for 5 sec, or longer.
5.Rotating the rotary SW01 to position “16”.
6.If you finish refrigerant recovery operation, set SW06-2 “OFF” and set SW01 “1”.
146
16-2. Outdoor unit settings (Existing piping, Power save, etc.)
The following settings are available with dip switch setting and jumper wire setting.
Function
Where to set
SW802
--- OFF
--- Existing piping setting
--- Power save setting
--- Snow prevention fan control
* All OFF position at factory default
1
ON
2
Power save setting
3
4
Existing piping
setting
Snow prevention
fan control
Control details
When using a Ø19.1 pipe for the existing piping, set the switch to ON.
This case may decrease heating capacity depending on the outside air
temperature when heating or on a room temperature.
When using the power save function, set the switch to ON. This setting
controls the compressor frequency lowering (about 10%) according to the
heat exchange temperature of the hydro unit during a heating or hot water
supply operation.
This control enables the function that prevents snow from entering the draft
air duct through the fan guard or a heat exchanger gap and causing motor
lock. If the outside air temperature is 0 °C below, this control operates the
outdoor fan in W5 even if the compressor is not in operation.
Defrosting time
change
J805, J806
If the defrosting interval is shorter than the standard, the jumper wire is cut.
For the control details or how to cut the jumper wire, see defrosting control.
Maximum
frequency change
J807
If the maximum value of compressor frequency need to be lowered, cut the
jumper wire shown on the left.
This control lowers the maximum frequency when hot water supply, heating,
or cooling is in operation.
In this case, the maximum capacity decreases.
Maximum frequency of compressor
Model
P805HR-E
P1105HR-E
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Standard
37.2
70.2
53.4
90.0
J807 cut
33.0
63.0
48.0
81.0
147
16-3. Service support functions (LED indication, Switch operation method)
The following settings are available with dip switches.
(1) Overview
Using 3 dip switches (SW802, SW803, SW804) and 2 push-button switches (SW800, SW801) can make settings
available and confirm operations.
For operation
Part number
Specification
SW800
Press button switch
SW803
Dip switch
SW801
Press button switch
SW804
Dip switch
SW802
Dip switch
Operation details
This switch switches the indications of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor control board.
This switch enables users to perform a special operation for maintenance and inspection.
This switch performs initial settings.
For display
Part number
D502
D503
Specification
Operation details
Amber LED
Signal display (signals from the hydro unit) of communication between hydro unit and
outdoor unit (serial communication)
Green LED
Signal display (signals from the outdoor unit) of communication between hydro unit and
outdoor unit (serial communication)
Yellow LED
Abnormality indication
All OFF of SW803 or the lit status of any of D800 to D804 indicates that the outdoor
control unit detects an abnormality.
Setting SW803 to other than OFF shows details with LED indication.
Green LED
Energization indication
This LED lights when the outdoor unit is energized.
During a special operation with the SW801 or SW804 operation, this LED blinks.
D800 to D804
D805
Note: All the LEDs have no colour when off.
<HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E>
SW804
SW801
Special operation switch (Operations
for maintenance and inspection)
LED indication switching switch
D800 (Yellow LED)
D801 (Yellow LED)
D802 (Yellow LED) Abnormality indication
D803 (Yellow LED) and other indications
D804 (Yellow LED)
D805 (Green LED) --- Energization indication
1
ON
1
D503 (Green LED) --- Serial signal (Outdoor to hydro)
D502 (Amber LED) --- Serial signal (Hydro to Outdoor)
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
ON
ON
2
3
4
SW800
SW803
SW802 --- Initial settings switching
148
(2) LED indication switching (SW800, SW803 operation)
(2) -1. Indication switching list
Operating SW803 can switch the indications of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control board.
Switch
Function and details
Abnormality indication (Current abnormality)
This switch indicates the current abnormality.
Without an abnormality, the lights are off.
4
SW803
1
ON
2
3
(See (2)-2)
Abnormal indication (Latest abnormality: Latest abnormality including the current one)
After the abnormality status is released, this setting enables users to see the previous abnormalities.
(Previous abnormality can be checked even if the power is once turned off.)
* If there is an abnormality now, the abnormality details of the current one is displayed.
* This setting does not display a TO sensor failure.
(Check for the failure with the setting for current abnormality.)
(See (2)-2)
4
3
1
ON
2
4
3
2
4
1
ON
2
3
4
3
1
ON
(See (2)-3)
TH
SW803
2
3
2
4
3
2
1
ON
Current indication
This switch indicates the current value in the outdoor unit.
(See (2)-3)
1
ON
2
3
4
SW803
Compressor operation frequency indication
This switch indicates the compressor operation frequency.
(See (2)-3)
1
ON
2
3
4
SW803
PMV position indication
This switch indicates PMV (Pulse motor valve) position.
(See (2)-3)
ON
2
3
4
SW803
1
1
ON
3
2
1
Temperature sensor indication
These switches indicate the temperature sensor detecting value.
* TC=TWO+2 (heating, hot water supply)
TC=TWO (cooling)
TC*
SW803
4
TWI
SW803
1
ON
1
ON
2
TL
SW803
4
TO
SW803
ON
TS
SW803
4
TE
SW803
3
TD
SW803
1
ON
2
3
4
SW803
149
Indication 1
(Initial indication)
D805 (Green)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
2
3
4
Legend)
---- Off
---- Light
---- Blink
1
ON
1
ON
2
3
4
Current abnormality Latest abnormality
SW803
SW803
D800 (Yellow)
(2) -2. Abnormality indication
The current abnormality and the latest abnormality (including the current one) can be identified by the
LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control board.
1) Setting all the SW803 dip switches to OFF indicates the current abnormality status.
2) Setting SW803 dip switch <1> only to ON indicates the previous abnormality (including the current
one).
3) An abnormality lights any of the LEDs from D800 to D804.(Indication 1)
4) Pressing the push-button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second switches indication.(Indication 2)
5) When SW800 is again pressed or 2 minutes has passed, the indication 1 status returns.
Indication 2
(SW800 operation)
Remote controller
Abnormality code
Abnormality details
Communication failure between MCUs
--F04
F06
F07
F08
F12
F13
F15
F24
F31
H01
H02
H03
H04
L10
L15
L29
Other abnormality (e.g. Compressor's loss of synchronism)
No abnormality confirmation
Abnormal discharge temperature
P03
P05
P07
P15
P19
P20
P22
P26
P29
Normal
Discharge temperature sensor (TD) failure
Heat exchanger temperature sensor (TE) failure
Heat exchanger temperature sensor (TL) failure
Outside air temperature sensor (TO) failure
Suction temperature sensor (TS) failure
Heat sink temperature sensor (TH) failure
Heat exchanger, suction sensor (TE, TS) wrong wiring
High pressure sensor (PD) failure
EEPROM failure
Compressor break down
Compressor lock
Current detection circuit failure
Faulty compressor case thermostat
Not set up the capacity
Combination failure between the hydro unit
Power failure
Heat sink overheat failure
Gas leakage detection
4-way valve reverse failure
Hi pressure protection operation
Fan drive system failure
Compressor drive
Compressor rotor position failure
150
SW803
SW803
3
2
1
ON
ON
2
3
2
3
4
3
3
4
ON
4
SW803
4
PMV position
(pulse)
1
ON
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
ON
Compressor
operation
frequency
(r.p.s.)
*Refer to page 149
1
ON
2
3
4
TC*
SW803
2
1
ON
1
ON
2
4
2
1
ON
3
2
1
Current
(A)
TL
SW803
3
TO
SW803
4
1
ON
2
TA
SW803
4
TH
SW803
ON
TS
SW803
3
TE
SW803
)
1
Temperature sensor (
TD
SW803
LED indication
---- Light
4
---- Off
1
Item setting
D805 (Green)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
Legend)
D800 (Yellow)
(2)-3. Sensor, Current, Compressor operation frequency, PMV position indication
The values detected by controller, such as temperature sensor or current values, can be easily checked.
0-0.9
1-1.9
2-2.9
3-3.9
4-4.9
5-5.9
6-6.9
7-7.9
8-8.9
9-9.9
10-10.9
11-11.9
12-12.9
13-13.9
14-14.9
15-15.9
16-16.9
17-17.9
18-18.9
19-19.9
20-20.9
21-21.9
22-22.9
23-23.9
24-24.9
25-25.9
26-26.9
27-27.9
28-28.9
29-29.9
30-30.9
31 or higher
less than -25
-25 - -21
-20 - -16
-15 - -11
-10 - -6
-5 - -1
0-4
5-9
10-14
15-19
20-24
25-29
30-34
35-39
40-44
45-49
50-54
55-59
60-64
65-69
70-74
75-79
80-84
85-89
90-94
95-99
100-104
105-109
110-114
115-119
120 or higher
sensor failure, not connected
0-4
5-9
10-14
15-19
20-24
25-29
30-34
35-39
40-44
45-49
50-54
55-59
60-64
65-69
70-74
75-79
80-84
85-89
90-94
95-99
100-104
105-109
110-114
115-119
120-124
125-129
130-134
135-139
140-144
145-149
150-154
155 or higher
0-19
20-39
40-59
60-79
80-99
100-119
120-139
140-159
160-179
180-199
200-219
220-239
240-259
260-279
280-299
300-319
320-339
340-359
360-379
380-399
400-419
420-439
440-459
460-479
480-499
500
-
* TD, TL, and TH show errors below the ordinary temperature because they are sensors for high temperature.
* Current value for the outdoor unit only is shown.
151
(3) Special operation for maintenance and inspection (SW801, SW804)
SW801 and SW804 can perform the following special operations for maintenance and inspection.
1) Switches the dip switch SW804. (See the table below)
2) Presses the push-button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.
3) Starts the functions shown below. During the start processing of each function, LED D805 (Green) blinks.
4) When the push-button switch SW801 is pressed for approx. 1 second, or the dip switch SW804 is switched,
or the defined time for each function has passed, the each function stops and LED D805 (Green) returns
to continuous lit.
<Special operation>
SW804
Refrigerant recovery operation
The outdoor unit operates cooling. The hydro unit may freeze with this operation alone. Remove beforehand the
water in the hydro unit. (See 10-15-1 (See page 146))
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Operation when press button switch SW801 is pressed
Hydro unit cooling request
Performs a trial cooling operation. (See Note1 (See page 152))
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Hydro unit heating request
Performs a trial heating operation.(See Note1 (See page 152))
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Fan motor forcible operation
Forcibly performs a fan motor operation.
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
control.
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
(No operation particularly)
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
4-way valve relay operation (RY700, CN700 for check)
Sets 4-way valve energization relay (RY700) to ON.
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
control.
1
2
3
4
SW804
ON
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
control.
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Caution:
Although these
controls are available
during an operation,
basically perform
them when no
PMV full close operation
operation is in
Fully closes PMV (Pulse motor valve).
progress.
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
Performing these
control.
controls during an
operation may cause
dangerously rapid
PMV half open operation
pressure change.
Half opens (250 pulses) PMV (Pulse motor valve).
PMV full open operation
Fully opens PMV (Pulse motor valve).
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
control.
Caution:
Do not connect the coil into the body when perform this operation.
(Note 1) The forced test run with this setting cannot be cancelled by the remote controller in the hydro unit.
Be sure to cancel the operation from the outdoor unit. (Press again SW801 for 1 second)
152
SW804
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Self-holding valve release operation (Switch to cooling cycle)
Sets relay RY700 to ON.
(CN701 Between 1 to 4 Voltage = Approx. 325V)
This function operates for 10 seconds. After that it becomes OFF.
Caution:
Although these
controls are available
during an operation,
basically perform
SV (2-way) valve relay operation (RY702, CN702 for check)
them when no
Sets SV valve relay (RY702) to ON.
operation is in
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
progress.
control.
Performing these
controls during an
Heater output relay operation (RY703, CN703 for check)
operation may cause
Sets relay for optional heater (RY703) to ON.
dangerously rapid
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
pressure change.
control.
External output relay operation (RY704, CN704 for check)
Sets relay for external output (RY704) to ON.
When SW801 is pressed again or after 2 minutes, the operation returns to the normal
control.
1
2
3
4
SW804
ON
Self-holding valve vacuum operation (Switch to heating cycle)
(RY700, RY701, RY705, CN701 for check)
Sets relay RY700, RY701, and RY705 to ON.
(CN701 Between 1 to 4 Voltage = Approx. 325V)
This function operates for 10 seconds. After that it becomes OFF.
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
Operation when press button switch SW801 is pressed
(No operation particularly)
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
External output relay operation change
Note:
Do not use this setting.
1
ON
2
3
4
SW804
(Note 1) The forced test run with this setting cannot be cancelled by the remote controller in the hydro unit.
Be sure to cancel the operation from the outdoor unit. (Press again SW801 for 1 second)
153
11 Replacement of the service PC board
 Setting the jumper wires and DIP switches
Outdoor unit
Service Parts (CDB)
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
3026V053 (MCC-1571)
Parts name
Jumper wire
DIP switch
Function
Setting
J800~J803
Model switching
Cut these jumper wires according to the following table.
J804~J811
Settings
Set these jumper wires to the settings of the PC board
before replacement.
SW802
Settings
Set SW802 to the setting of the PC board before
replacement.
SW803
LED indication switching
Set SW803 to all OFF.
SW804
Special operations for
service
Set SW804 to all OFF.
SW805 (Only H8series)
Special operations for
service
Set SW805 to all OFF
Model switching (J800 to J803)
Since this service PC board is available for several models, cut the jumper wires according to the following table.
If they are not cut correctly, an error code “L10” or “L29” appears on the remote controller and the operation of the
air conditioner is disabled.
Model name
J 800
J 801
J 802
Factory default
HWS-805H-E
HWS-1105H-E
HWS-1405H-E
HWS-P805HR-E
HWS-P1105HR-E
* : Characters that indicate the following:
No character -- Standard models
R ----- For with cord heater
:Connected,
<HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E>
SW804
MCC-1571
SW803
SW802
J800-J803
154
:Cut
J 803
12 How to exchange main parts
WARNING
<Turn off the power breaker>
Because the electrical components are energized with high voltage, always turn off the power breaker before
starting to work.
<Check>
Ensure that no water pressure is present when replacing the water circuit (circulation pump, heater unit, flow switch, etc).
After a repair is complete, perform a test run (after attaching the front panel, upper and lower cabinets, and side cabinet)
and check that no abnormality including smoke or abnormal noise occurs. Failure to do so may cause a fire or an electric
shock. Place the cabinets before making a test run.
<Watch out for fire>
Observe the following instructions when repairing the refrigerant cycle.
(1) Watch out for surrounding fire. Always put out the fire of stove burner or other devices before starting the repair.
Should the fire fail to be put out, the oil mixed with refrigerant gas could catch fire.
(2) Do not use a welder in a closed room.
A room with no ventilation may cause carbon monoxide poisoning.
(3) Keep away flammable materials.
The materials may catch the fire of a welder.
CAUTION
<Wear gloves>
Wear gloves (∗) when performing repair.
Failure to do so may cause an injury when accidentally contacting the parts.
∗: Thick gloves such as cotton work gloves
1. Hydro Unit
No.
1
Exchange parts name
Common procedure
Front panel
Electrical control box
cover (lower)
Electrical control box
cover (upper)
Work procedure
Remarks
Wear gloves when performing the work.
Failure to do so may cause an injury when
accidentally contacting the parts.
1. How to remove
1) Stop the hydro unit operation, and turn off the power
breaker.
2) Remove the front panel.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10, 6 screws)
3) After unscrew the screws, remove the front panel by
pulling it toward you.
4) Remove the electrical control box cover (lower).
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
5) Disconnect the power source cable and outdoor unit
connecting cable from the terminal block.
6) Remove the electrical control box cover (upper).
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 4 screws)
7) Disconnect the remote controller connecting cable
from the CN41 connector of the water heat
exchange board.
2. How to attach
1) Connect the remote controller connecting cable to
the water heat exchange board.
2) Attach the electrical control box cover (upper).
3) Connect the power source cable and outdoor unit
connecting cable to the terminal block, and fix with
the cord clamp.
4) Attach the electrical control box cover (lower).
5) Attach the front panel.
155
Front panel
Electrical control
box cover (lower)
Electrical control
box cover (upper)
No.
2
Exchange parts name
Remote controller
Work procedure
1.How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Remove the remote controller from the holder using
a flat-blade screwdriver. (Release the stopper.)
3) Disconnect the remote controller cable from the
terminal block on the back side of the remote
controller.
2.How to attach
1) Attach it in the reverse order of the removal.
Remarks
Remote
controller holder
Remote
controller
Remote controller cable
3
Water heat
exchanger board
MCC-1511
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Disconnect the connectors and lead cables
connected to other parts from the water heat
exchanger board.
1. Connector
CN100: TB 01 3P Connector (5P: White)
CN101: Trans (3P: White)
CN102: Trans (6P: White)
CN200: Flow switch (3P: Red)
CN201: Pressure switch (2P: White)
CN202: Bimetal thermostat (3P: Yellow)
CN203: TC sensor (2P: Yellow)
CN204: TWI sensor (3P: Brown)
CN205: TWO sensor (2P: Red)
CN206: THO sensor (3P: White)
CN207: Low pressure sensor (2P: Blue)
CN212: Low pressure sensor (4P: White)
CN213: TB 06 4P Terminal block (3P: White)
CN214: TB 06 4P Terminal block (2P: White)
CN305: TB 01 3P Terminal block (3P: Green)
CN500: PWM control line (6P: Blue)
CN501: Relay board (6P: Yellow)
CN601: Relay 05 (3P: Red)
CN602: TB 04 6P Terminal block (7P: White)
CN603: Pump (3P: Yellow)
CN604: Relay 06, TB 04 4P Terminal block (7P:
Blue)
CN605: Relay 01, Relay 02 (3P: Yellow)
CN606: Relay 03, Relay 04 (3P: Blue)
2. Round-shape terminal
100: Ground (ST2T Ø4 × 8, 1 wire)
NOTE
When removing the connector, release the safety lock of
the housing.
3) Release the 6 stoppers of the water heat exchanger
board to remove the board.
156
Water heat
exchanger board
No.
4
Exchange parts name
Relay board
MCC-1431
Work procedure
Remarks
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Disconnect the connectors and lead cables
connected to other parts from the relay board.
1. Connector
CN01: TB 01 3P Terminal block (3P: White)
CN02: Water heat exchanger board (5P: White)
CN10: TB 05 9P Terminal block (9P: White)
NOTE
When removing the connector, release the safety lock of
the housing.
3) Release the 3 stoppers of the relay board to remove
the board.
5
Electric parts
assembly
Relay board
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Disconnect the connectors and lead cables
connected to other parts from the water heat
exchanger board.
1. Connector
CN200: Flow switch (3P: Red)
CN201: Pressure switch (2P: White)
CN202: Bimetal thermostat (3P: Yellow)
CN203: TC sensor (2P: Yellow)
CN204: TWI sensor (3P: Brown)
CN205: TWO sensor (2P: Red)
CN206 THO sensor (3P: White)
CN207: Low pressure sensor (2P: Blue)
CN212: Low pressure sensor (4P: White)
CN603: Pump (3P: Yellow)
Disconnect the heater power source cable (For
backup heater and hot water cylinder heater) from
the MgSW.
NOTE
When removing the connector, release the safety lock of
the housing.
3) Remove the fixed screws.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
4) Remove the electric parts assembly by pulling it
toward you while pulling it upward because the
assembly back side has a hook holding structure.
157
Electric parts assembly
No.
6
Exchange parts name
Side board
Work procedure
1. Side board (Right)
1) Perform the step 1-1-1), 2), 3).
2) Remove the fixed screws of the side board (Right).
(ST1T Ø4 × 10, 5 screws)
3) Remove the fixed screws of the side board (Right)
and the manometer fixing board. (ST1T Ø4 × 10, 2
screws)
Remarks
Side board (Right)
2. Side board (Left)
1) Remove the fixed screws of the side board (Left).
(ST1T Ø4 × 10, 5 screws)
Side board (Left)
7
Upper board
1) Perform the step 1-1-1), 2), 3) and step 6.
2) Remove the fixed screws of the upper board.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10, 4 screws)
8
Bottom board
1) Perform the step 1-1-1), 2), 3) and step 6.
2) Remove the fixed screws of the bottom board.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10, 4 screws)
Removal is required if water and refrigerant piping
are connected.
Upper
Upper
board
Bottom board
158
No.
9
Exchange parts name
Expansion vessel
Work procedure
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
Remarks
Expansion vessel
1) Perform the step 1-1, step 5, step 6-1
2) Remove the fixed band of the expansion vessel.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 4 screws)
3) Remove the expansion vessel connection.
When installing the expansion vessel, please attach
the waterproof seal at the water connection.
After the expansion vessel replacement repair,
open the water supply source valve and water
piping valve to pass water through the hydro unit,
and check that the expansion vessel connection has
no water leakage.
Expansion vessel
Fixed band
When installing the
expansion vessel, please
attach the waterproof seal
at the water connection.
10
Overpressure
preventive valve
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
Overpressure preventive valve
connecting hose
1) Perform the step 1-1, step 5, step 6-1
2) Remove the quick fastener.
3) Remove the Overpressure preventive valve.
The Overpressure preventive valve connection
uses an O ring for water seal. Be careful not to
scratch the O ring; otherwise, water leakage may
occur.
After the Overpressure preventive valve
replacement repair, open the water supply source
valve and water piping valve to pass water through
the hydro unit, and check that the Overpressure
preventive valve connection has no water leakage.
11
Air vent valve
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
1) Perform the step 1-1-1), 2), 3), step 6-1.
2) Remove the air vent valve.
The Air vent valve connection uses an O ring for
water seal. Be careful not to scratch the O ring;
otherwise, water leakage may occur.
After the air vent valve replacement repair, open the
water supply source valve and water piping valve to
pass water through the hydro unit, and check that
the air vent valve connection has no water leakage.
159
Quick fastener
Overpressure
preventive valve
Air vent valve
No.
Exchange parts name
12
Pump
Work procedure
Remarks
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
Pump
fixing
board
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1-1), 2), 3), step 6-1.
2) Remove the 2 nuts of the heater connection and the
lower side of the pump. (Water pipe wrench is
necessary.)
3) Remove the pump fixing board.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 4 screws)
4) Remove the nut of the upper part of the pump.
2. How to attach
The pump connection uses a liquid packing for
water seal. When replacing the pump, use a
packing which was slathered with the liquid gasket.
Part code
Service parts
37595721
Packing
Nut
Nut
1) Attach a new pump in the reverse order of the
removal.
After the pump replacement repair, open the water
supply source valve and water piping valve to pass
water through the hydro unit, and check that the
pump connection has no water leakage.
Pump
160
Nut
No.
Exchange parts name
13
Flow switch
Work procedure
Remarks
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1 and step 5.
2) Remove the flow switch.
The flow switch connection uses an O ring for water
seal. Be careful not to scratch the O ring; otherwise,
water leakage may occur.
2. How to attach
1) Attach a new flow switch in the reverse order of the
removal.
NOTE
As shown on the right,
place a flow sensor parallel to the water heat exchanger
inlet pipe so that the wire is place on the right side from
the front view.
Flow switch
After the flow switch replacement repair, open the
water supply source valve and water piping valve to
pass water through the hydro unit, and check that
the flow switch connection has no water leakage.
Water heat inlet pipe
Wire
Flow switch
14
Manometer
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1 and step 5 and 6.
2) Remove the manometer.
After the manometer replacement repair, open the
water supply source valve and water piping valve to
pass water through the hydro unit, and check that
the manometer connection has no water leakage.
Manometer
161
No.
Exchange parts name
15
Heater assembly
Work procedure
Remarks
To replace a water circuit part, first close the water
supply source valve and the valve of water pipe
connected to the hydro unit.
Nut
Nut
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1, step 5, 6, 7, and 11.
2) Remove the nut of the heater connection.
3) Remove the 2 fixed screws of the heater.
4) Pull the heater out upward.
5) Remove the insulator from the heater.
2. How to attach
The heater connection uses a liquid packing for
water seal. When replacing the heater, use a
packing which was slathered with the liquid gasket.
Part code
Service parts
37595721
Packing
Heater
assembly
1) Attach a new heater in the reverse order of the
removal.
After the heater assembly replacement repair, open
the water supply source valve and water piping
valve to pass water through the hydro unit, and
check that the heater connection has no water
leakage.
Insulator
Heater
Heater
assembly
assembly
16
TC sensor
TWI sensor
TWO sensor
THO sensor
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1 and step 5.
2) Take the sensor out.
TC sensor
Sensor diameter:
Tube color: Black
TWI sensor
Sensor diameter:
Tube color: Blue
6
4
162
THO sensor
Sensor diameter:
Tube color: Gray
6
TWO sensor
Sensor diameter:
Tube color: Red
6
No.
Exchange parts name
17
Water heat
exchanger assembly
Work procedure
• Close the water piping source valve and the valve
of water pipe connected to the hydro unit, and
then remove the refrigerant and water piping.
• Perform refrigerant recovery with the outdoor
unit.
• Disconnect all the power source cable, outdoor
unit connection cable, and cylinder connection
cable.
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1, step 5, 6, and 8.
2) Remove the water pipe fixing board.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
3) Remove the refrigerant piping fixing board.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 3 screws)
4) Remove the nut of the heater connection.
5) Remove the fixed screws of the electrical control
box fixing board.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 4 screws)
6) Remove the side reinforcing board (left).
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 6 screws) 3 for inside, 3 for outside
7) Remove the water heat exchanger fixing band.
(ST2T Ø4 × 8, 6 screws)
8) Remove the water heat exchanger assembly.
Remarks
Water
piping fixing
Refrigerant
piping fixing
board
Nut
Electrical
control
box fixing
The heater connection uses a packing for water
seal. Be careful not to scratch the packing;
otherwise, water leakage may occur.
2. How to attach
1) Attach a new water heat exchanger assembly in the
reverse order of the removal.
2) Restore all piping and wiring as in the original state,
and check that there is no water or refrigerant
leakage.
• After the water heat exchanger assembly
replacement repair, open the water supply source
valve and water piping source valve to pass
water through the hydro unit, and check that the
connection has no water leakage.
• After connecting the refrigerant pipe, check that
the connection has no refrigerant leakage.
Side
reinforcing
board (left)
Water heat exchanger
fixing band
The piping structure
slightly differs in
11 kW and 8 kW
specifications.
Water heat exchanger assembly
163
2. Outdoor Unit
HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E
No.
1
Exchange parts
name
Common procedure
Work procedure
NOTE
Remarks
Front panel
Wear gloves when performing the work.
Failure to do so may cause an injury when accidentally
contacting the parts.
1. How to remove
1) Stop the operation by remote controller and turn
off the breaker.
2) Remove the front panel.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
• After unscrewing the screws, remove the front
panel while pulling it downward.
3) Disconnect the power source cable and
connecting cables between hydro and outdoor
from the cord clamp and terminals.
4) Remove the top board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 5 screws)
2. How to attach
1) Attach the top board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 5 screws)
2) Connect the power source cable and connecting
cables between hydro and outdoor to the terminal,
and fix them with the cord clamp.
NOTE
The power source cable and connecting cable between
hydro and outdoor units must be fixed along the
connecting piping by using a cable tie so that the
cables do not contact the compressor, gas side valve,
gas side piping and outlet pipe.
Top board
3) Attach the front panel.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
164
No.
2
Exchange parts
name
Outlet cabinet
Work procedure
How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Remove the screws of the outlet cabinet and
parting board.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 4 screws)
3) Remove the screws of the outlet cabinet and
bottom board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
4) Remove the screws of the outlet cabinet and
motor base.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
5) Remove the screws of the outlet cabinet and heat
exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 screws)
6) Remove the screws of the outlet cabinet and fin
guard.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
Remarks
Heat exchanger
Motor base
Outlet cabinet
Paring board
Fin guard
3
Side cabinet
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Remove the screws that fixes the inverter
assembly and the side cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
3) Remove the screws of the side cabinet and valve
fixing board.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 screws)
4) Remove the screws of the side cabinet and piping
panel (back).
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
5) Remove the screws of the side cabinet and bottom
board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 1 screws)
6) Remove the screws of the side cabinet and fin
guard (heat exchanger).
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 5 screws)
7) Remove the side cabinet while shifting it upward
(inverter hook).
Inverter assembly
Valve fixing board
165
Side cabinet
No.
4
Exchange parts
name
Electric parts
replacement
Work procedure
1. Control board
1) Perform the step 1-1.
Remarks
Control board
Compressor
case
thermostat
WARNING
Fan motor (upper)
Reactor lead
connector A
For 1 minute after the power is turned off, do not
disassemble the inverter to prevent an electric shock.
2) Remove the connector connected to the control
(Hydro power source, temperature sensor, electric
control valve coil, 4-way valve coil, compressor
case thermostat, fan motor, high pressure switch)
* Remove the connector by releasing the lock in the
housing.
3) Remove the lead cable connected to the control
board.
Compressor lead U: CN200 Red
V: CN201 White
W: CN202 Black
Reactor lead connector A
connector B
Compressor lead
High pressure
switch
Earth wire
Fan motor (lower)
Temperature sensor
4-way valve coil
Motorized control coil
Hydro power source
Reactor lead
connector B
4) Remove the earth wire of the control board.
(Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 1 screw)
5) Remove the fixed screws of the control board.
(Collar screw for fixing element Ø3 × 16, 9 screws,
Pan S-tight screw for fixing the board Ø3 × 20, 1
screw)
6) Remove the control board.
(Supporter 5 positions)
Note) Removing the control board may be difficult
due to the heat release grease for the heat
sink.
Screw for fixing
board
Screw for fixing element
(9 positions)
Control board
Insulating
sheet
7) Attach a new control board.
NOTE
• Be careful for not taking the compressor lead V:
CN201 White for the reactor lead CN05 or 06
White.
(The compressor lead has a transparent sleeve at
its ring terminal. The reactor lead ring terminal does
not have sleeve.)
• Be sure to attach the insulating sheet.
(Applying beforehand a bit of heat release grease
to the back side of the insulating sheet can easily
paste the sheet to the heat sink.)
166
Hear release
grease
No.
4
Exchange parts
name
Electric parts
replacement
Work procedure
2. Reactor
1) Perform the step 1-1.
Remarks
Binding tie
(Compressor lead)
2) Remove the reactor lead connected to the control
board.
Reactor lead connector A, B
Reactor lead
connector A
Control board
3) Cut the binding tie that binds the compressor leads
and fan motor leads.
4) Remove the reactor.
(Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 4 screw)
5) Attach a new reactor.
NOTE
Be sure to bind the removed binding tie by using the
commercially available binding tie.
Make sure that the fan motor lead and the reactor body
do not contact each other.
Binding tie
(Compressor lead,
Reactor lead)
Binding tie
(Fan motor lead,
Reactor lead,
Compressor lead)
167
Fan motor lead
Reactor body
No.
5
Exchange parts
name
Fan motor
Work procedure
Remarks
1) Perform the step 1-1 and step 2.
2) Remove the fan motor and the flange nut that fixes
the propeller fan.
• To loosen the flange nut, turn it clockwise.
(Turn it counter clockwise for tightening.)
Turn it right
to loosen
Propeller fan
3) Remove the propeller fan.
4) Remove the connector for fan motor from the
inverter. (control board)
(Remove the ferrite core of the lower fan motor to
use it again for a new fan motor.)
Flange nut
Propeller fan
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan motor
lead fixing rubber on the through hole of the
parting board.
6) Remove the fixed screws (4 for each) while
holding the fan motor so that it does not drop.
Fan motor
* Notes in assembling fan motor
• Tighten the flange nut in 4.95 N•m (50 kgf•cm).
• To prevent the fan motor lead from contacting
the propeller fan, adjust the length of fan motor
lead fixing rubber so that it does not slack.
Attach the fan motor lead fixing rubber to the
parting board so that the projection part is
placed on the refrigerant cycle side.
• Make sure that the reactor body and the fan
motor lead do not contact each other.
• Be sure to bind the removed binding tie by
using the commercially available binding tie.
• Be sure to re-attach the ferrite core of the
lower fan motor. (Fix this with a commercially
available binding tie.)
Fan motor
connector (upper)
Fan motor
connector (lower)
Fan motor ferrite
core (lower)
Fan motor lead
fixing rubber
NOTE
Fix the fan motor lead to the motor base using a metal
tie so that the fan motor lead does not contact the
propeller fan.
Projection / Refrigerant
cycle side
Fan motor lead
fixing rubber
Projection / Refrigerant
cycle side
Fan motor
168
6
Exchange parts
name
Compressor
Compressor lead
Work procedure
1. Remove defective compressor
1) Perform refrigerant gas recovery.
2) Perform the step 1-1 and step 3.
3) Remove the piping panel (Front).
Remove screws of the piping panel (Front) and
bottom board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
Remove screws of the piping panel (Front and
Back).
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 1 screws)
4) Remove the piping panel (Back).
Remove screws of the piping panel (Back) and
bottom board.
(Hex Ø4 × 10, 2 screws)
5) Remove the soundproofing board. (Upper, Inward
winding, Outward winding)
6) Remove the compressor terminal cover, and then
remove the compressor lead and compressor
case thermostat.
Remarks
Piping panel (Front)
Piping panel (Back)
Piping cover
TD sensor
Binding tie
(for heat resistance)
Compressor lead
Compressor case thermostat
Black
Control board
White
Red
7) Remove the TD sensor fixed to the discharge
piping.
8) Remove the compressor lead. (Leave the ferrite
core attached to the electrical control box.)
Control board U: CN200 Red
V: CN201 White
W: CN202 Black
9) Remove the outlet and suction pipes connected to
the compressor by using a burner.
Compressor lead
Compressor lead
WARNING
When removing the piping by burning the solder, take
enough care for a fire going off at the moment the wax
melts if oil remains inside the piping.
NOTE
Do not make fire flame contact with the 4-way valve
and pulse motor valve.
(This may cause an operation failure.)
Ferrite core
Remove
(Outlet pipe)
Remove
(Suction pipe)
10) Pull out the discharge and suction pipes of the
refrigerant cycle upward.
11) Remove the compressor nuts that fix the
compressor to the bottom board. (3 nuts)
12)Pull the compressor out toward you.
NOTE
The compressor weighs 20 kg or more.
Two people should be required to handle it.
450
No.
Compressor nut
(3 nuts)
169
No.
6
Exchange parts
name
Compressor
Compressor lead
Work procedure
2. Attach the compressor
1) Attach the compressor in the reverse order of the
removal.
Remarks
Compressor lead
Wind ferrite core with
compressor lead
for 4 times
NOTE
• Be sure to replace the compressor lead after the
compressor replacement. (Compressor lead spare
parts code: 43160591)
At this time, wind the ferrite core with the
compressor lead for 4 times.
• Attach the soundproofing board (Inward winding,
Outward winding), as shown in the right figure,
through between the compressor and between the
piping and parting board.
• Fix the TD sensor with a commercially available
heat resistant binding tie through the piping cover
so that the sensor do not contact the discharge
pipe.
Ferrite core
0 to 50
(Compressor lead positioning standard)
Place soundproofing board (Outward winding)
through between suction pipe and header pipe
Overlap soundproofing board
(Outward winding) at this position
Header pipe
3) Vacuuming
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge port and
check joint of the gas piping valve to operate the
vacuum pump.
2) Perform vacuuming until the vacuum low pressure
gauge shows 1(mmHg).
NOTE
Suction pipe
Open fully the pulse motor valve before vacuuming.
With the valve closed, vacuuming between the outdoor
unit liquid valve and the pulse motor valve may fail.
How to make pulse motor valve forcible full open
• Turn on the electric leakage breaker.
• Set the SW804 dip switch 1 and 3 on the outdoor
unit control board to ON.
• Press SW801 on the outdoor unit control board
for 1 second or longer.
• After pressing SW801 for 1 second or longer,
turn off the electric leakage breaker within
2 minutes.
4. Charge refrigerant
1) Add refrigerant whose amount is defined
according to the piping length from the valve
charge port. (HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E :
2.7 kg)
Overlap soundproofing board (Inward winding)
at this position through between compressor,
outlet pipe, and suction pipe
Do not make space between soundproofing boards
(Upper and Outward winding)
Soundproofing
board (Upper)
Rivet
Make the other end of the
line go through under the rivet
Soundproofing board
(Outward winding)
SW804
170
Discharge pipe
SW801
No.
7
Exchange parts
name
Work procedure
Pulse motor valve coil 1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1.
2) Remove the coil from the pulse motor valve body
by pulling upward while rotating the coil.
Remarks
Recess
Pulse motor valve body
2. How to attach
1) Fix the coil by exactly adjusting the coil positioning
projection to the recess of the pulse motor valve
body.
Positioning
projection
8
Fan guard
1. How to remove
1) Perform the step 1-1 and step 2.
PT2P Ø3 x 14 and washer
Fan guard
NOTE
Motorized
control valve coil
Bellmouth
Outlet cabinet
Perform a replacement work on cardboard or cloth to
prevent the product from being damaged.
2) Remove the outlet cabinet and put with the fan
guard side down.
3) Remove the screw for the bell mouth and fan
guard.
(PT2P Ø3 x 14 and washer, 4 pcs.)
4) Release the hooks (8 positions) of the fan guard.
2. How to attach
1) Press the hooks (8 positions) with hands from the
front side to fix them.
2) Attach the bell mouth fixed with screws and
washers.
(PT2P Ø3 x 14 and washer, 4 pcs.)
NOTE
Check that all the hooks are fixed to the given
positions.
171
Hooks
No.
9
Exchange parts
name
Bottom plate heater
Work procedure
1. Detachment
1) Recover the refrigerant. (See 16-1. Refrigerant
recovery control)
Drain the water in the hydro unit before refrigerant
recovery.
2) Execute steps 1-1, 2, and 3.
3) Detach the two fin guards.
(9 pcs. hex screws Ø4 × 10)
4) Detach the two piping panels.
(5 pcs. hex screws Ø4 × 10)
5) Disconnect the 3” and 5” refrigerant pipes.
6) Disconnect the fan motor connectors from the PC
board (one for the upper fan and one for the lower
fan. Cut the tie-lap bands (6) location)
7) Detach the fan motor base.
(2 pcs. hex screws Ø5 × 10)
8) Remove the insulation mats (One above the
compressor and two around it).
9) Remove the three nuts fixing the compressor.
10) Remove the screw fixing the partition plate and
bottom plate.
(1 pcs. ST1T Ø4 × 8)
11) Remove the screws fixing the heat exchanger
and bottom plate.
(2 pcs. ST1T Ø4 × 8)
12) Disconnect the connector of the bottom plate
heater from the CDB PC board.
13) Lift the main unit up and detach the bottom plate.
14) Replace the heater.
(21 pcs. ST2T Ø4 × 8 and 2 pcs. hex screw Ø5 ×
10)
Remarks
3)
Fan motor connection
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
2. Attachment
Execute the opposite of steps 1)-13) in reverse
order.
Note for step 10
The partition plate has a cutout for the heater.
Connect the heater cord through the cutout when
reassembling the unit.
4)
11)
13)
Cut out
Lift up the main unit
14)
Bottom plate heater.
The connector must get close to this screw.
Only this cord clamp must be attached downward-facing.
172
13 For cooling installation
If user install the Hydro unit to place humidity location or high humidity region, also user use cooling mode, please
attach moisture- proof parts which parts are contained in Hydro unit.
Hydro unit
Insulator
• Stick the optional insulator for cooling to the bottom
of the Hydro Unit.
173
14 Periodic inspection items
For a long-term safe operation of this equipment, perform periodic inspection and parts replacement.
<Inspection items>
Hydro unit
(HWS-P805**-E, P1105**-E)
1. Insulation measurement (Power source circuit /
Heater circuit)
Frequency
Annually
Periodic inspection details
Insulation measurement with a mega tester
2. Power source measurement (No-load voltage)
Annually
Electronic voltage measurement: 220-230 V ±10%
3. Operation check
Annually
Hot water supply / Heating / *-Cooling operation check with
remote controller
4. Refrigerant leakage / Water leakage inspection
Annually
Visual inspection and check with a leak tester: No leakage
must be found
5. Water heat exchanger inspection (Internal dirt and
clogging)
Annually
Checking for water dirtiness in a closed cycle, Cleaning
6. Inlet / Outlet water temperature measurement
Annually
Temperature measurement: Temperature measurement
during an operation
7. Circulation pump inspection
Annually
No leakage or abnormal noise must be found (Replacement
every 10 years: Charged)
8. Air vent valve inspection
Annually
Water leakage, Air vent
9. Expansion vessel
Annually
Visual check for charge pressure abnormality, water
leakage, or corrosion
10. Heater assembly
Annually
Check for appearance damage, deformation, or loose
terminal
11. Flow switch
Annually
Operation check while running
12. Manometer
Annually
Water leakage, water pressure check
13. Safety valve
Annually
Water leakage, Appearance check, Drainage check
14. Water heat exchanger control board, Terminal block
Annually
Check for loose connector and connecting terminal
Outdoor unit
(HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E)
Frequency
Periodic inspection details
1. Insulation measurement (Power source circuit /
Compressor)
Annually
Insulation measurement with a mega tester
2. Power source measurement (No-load voltage / Rated
operation)
Annually
Electronic voltage measurement:
220-230 V ±10% (Single phase type)
3. Operation frequency (Outdoor unit operation check)
Annually
Frequency check by rated operation (See 10-13)
4. Refrigerant leakage inspection
Annually
Visual inspection and check connection with a leak tester:
No leakage must be found
5. Air heat exchanger inspection (Dirt and clogging)
Annually
Visual inspection, Clear clogging
6. Fan inspection (Scratch, damage)
Annually
Check for scratches or damages to the fan or abnormal
motor sound
7. Cycle parts
(Compressor, 4-way valve, Pulse motor valve)
Annually
Annually
Operation check by trial run
8. Inverter control board, Terminal block
Annually
Check for loose connector and connecting terminal
Hot water cylinder
(HWS-150CSHM3-E(-UK),
210CSHM3-E(-UK), 300CSHM3-E(-UK))
Frequency
Periodic inspection details
1. Insulation measurement (Power source circuit)
Annually
2. Power source measurement (No-load voltage)
Annually
Electronic voltage measurement: 220-230 V ±10%
3. Water leakage inspection
Annually
Visual inspection for leakage: No leakage must be found
4. Terminal block
Annually
Check for loose connector and connecting terminal
5. Heater assembly
Annually
Check for appearance damage, deformation, or loose
terminal
6. Temperature, Pressure relief valve (Specification for
UK only)
Annually
Drainage check
174
Insulation measurement with a mega tester
175
237
238
201
203
205
208
202
236
204
212
211
218
207
213
203
210 242
216
206
215
Portion A
217
Details of portion A
242 243
209
241 244
15 Part exploded view, part list
Hydro Unit
E-P-Box Assembly (Hydro Unit)
223
220
235
234
224
222
224
239
240
221
230
225
227
226
233
231
232
235
228
229
176
Safety
Location
No.
Part No.
201
202
203
204
37500840
37500800
37500801
37500835
205
37566711 REMOTE CONTROLLER
206
206
207
HWSP805XW
HM3-E
1
1
2
1
Description
CABINET, FRONT
PLATE, UP
PLATE, SIDE
PLATE, DN, ASSY
1
PIPE ASSY, WATER HEAT
37546887
EXCHANGER
PIPE ASSY, WATER HEAT
37546888
EXCHANGER
37541739 PUMP, WATER, ASSY
Number of pieces per unit
HWSHWSHWSHWSP805XW P805XW P1105X
P1105X
HT6-E
HT9-E
WHM3-E WHT6-E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
HWSP1105X
WHT9-E
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
207
37541740 PUMP, WATER, ASSY
1
1
1
208
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
210
211
212
37542710 VESSEL, EXPANTION
VALVE ASSY, OVERPRESSURE
37547773
PREVENTIVE
37519776 FASTENER, QUICK
37547769 VALVE, AIR VENT
37543706 METER, PRESSURE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
213
37545713 HEATER ASSY
1
213
37545714 HEATER ASSY
213
37545715 HEATER ASSY
215
37551736 SENSOR, LOW PRESSURE
216
216
217
218
37551735
37551737
43F32441
37595721
220
221
209
1
1
1
1
1
SWITCH, FLOW
SWITCH, FLOW
NIPPLE, DRAIN
PACKING, ASSY
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3026V072 PC BOARD ASSY
1
1
1
1
1
1
4316V338 PC BOARD ASSY
1
1
1
1
1
1
222
43152401 CONTACTOR, MAGNETIC
2
3
3
2
3
3
223
43158187 TRANSFORMER
1
1
1
1
1
1
224
43154156 RELAY, LY1F
1
2
2
1
2
2
225
43054107 RELAY, LY1F
1
1
1
1
1
1
226
43160297 FUSE
4
6
8
4
6
8
227
43060059 FUSE, HOLDER
4
6
8
4
6
8
228
43160565 TERMINAL BLOCK, 3P, 20A
1
1
1
1
1
1
229
43160566 TERMINAL BLOCK, 6P, 20A
1
1
1
1
1
1
230
4306A130 TERMINAL BLOCK, 9P, 20A
1
1
1
1
1
1
231
43160576 TERMINAL BLOCK, 4P, 20A
1
1
1
1
1
1
232
43160579 TERMINAL
1
1
1
1
1
1
233
43160561 TERMINAL, 4P
1
1
1
1
1
1
234
43050425 SENSOR ASSY, SERVICE
3
3
3
3
3
3
235
43150320 SENSOR ASSY, SERVICE
2
2
2
2
2
2
236
43160568 TERMINAL, 2P
1
1
1
1
1
1
237
238
37517875 MARK, ESTIA
37517876 MARK, TOSHIBA FOR ESTIA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
239
43160571 FUSE, HOLDER, 15A, 250V
2
2
2
2
2
2
240
43F6A156 FUSE(ET), 3.15A, AC250V
2
2
2
2
2
2
241
242
243
244
3025Q006
3025Q013
3025S012
3025S013
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
RING, O
RING, O
FASTENER,QUICK
FASTENER,QUICK
177
020
052
015
022
012
029
030
053 054
017
021
178
010
005
023
007 008 036
003
013
027 037
058
035
034
024
031 033
026 032
028
038
018
006 009
016 057
004 025
055 056
014
011
019
001
002
Outdoor Unit (HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E)
Safety
Ref. No.
Part No.
001
43F19904
002
003
Description
Number of pieces per unit
HWS-P805HR-E
HWS-P1105HR-E
HOLDER, SENSOR (TS)
3
3
43F32441
NIPPLE, DRAIN
1
1
43041794
COMPRESSOR, DA422A3F-25M
1
1
004
43F47246
BONNET, 3/8 IN
1
1
005
43F47669
NUT, FLANGE
2
2
006
43049739
CUSHION, RUBBER
3
3
007
43F50407
THERMOSTAT,BIMETAL
1
1
008
43F63317
HOLDER,THERMOSTAT
1
1
009
43F97212
NUT
3
3
010
43100437
PANEL, FRONT, PIPING
1
1
011
43100438
PANEL, BACK, PIPING
1
1
012
43100439
PANEL, FRONT
1
1
013
43100440
PLATE, ROOF
1
1
014
43100441
PANEL, SIDE
1
1
015
43100442
PANEL, AIR OUTLET
1
1
016
37500804
BASE ASSY
1
1
017
43107274
GUARD, FIN, SIDE
1
1
018
43107275
GUARD, FIN, BACK
1
1
019
43107276
HANGER
3
3
020
43119540
GUARD, FAN ASSY
2
2
021
43120244
FAN, PROPELLER, PB521
2
2
022
43122113
BELL MOUTH
2
2
023
4312C100
MOTOR, FAN, ICF-280-A100-1(A)
2
2
024
43146676
J0INT,CHECK
1
1
025
4314N092
VALVE, PACKED, 9.52
1
1
026
37546878
VALVE, 4-WAY, STF-H0404
1
1
027
43146724
VALVE, BALL, SBV-JA5GTC-1, R0HS
1
1
028
43148170
ACCUMULATOR ASS'Y
1
1
029
37546876
CONDENSER ASSY, DOWN
1
1
030
37546877
CONDENSER ASSY, UP
1
1
031
4314N023
VALVE, PLUS, MODULAING, UKV-25D100
1
1
032
37547768
COIL, VLVE, 4WAY, STF-H01AP1880A1
1
1
033
4314N025
COIL, PMV, UKV-A038
1
1
034
4314Q031
STRAINER
1
1
035
4314Q032
STRAINER
1
1
036
43160591
LEAD ASSY, COMPRESSOR
1
1
037
43194029
BONNET, 5/8 IN
1
1
038
37551741
SWITCH ASSY, PRESSURE ACB-4UB154W
1
1
052
37517891
MARK, TOSHIBA FOR ESTIA
1
1
053
4314N038
COIL, SOLENOID, AC220-240 50HZ
1
1
054
43146711
VALVE, 2WAY
1
1
055
43160571
FUSE, HOLDER, 15A, 250V
2
2
056
43F6A156
FUSE(ET), 3.15A, AC250V
2
2
057
37545716
HEATER ASSY
1
1
058
37550762
SENSOR ASSY, PRESSURE
1
1
179
Inverter Assembly (HWS-P805HR-E, P1105HR-E)
704
709 710
711
707
705
706
703
708
TD,TL
TO
701
702
TS,TE,TO
TE
180
Safety
Ref. No.
Part No.
701
43050425
702
Description
Number of pieces per unit
HWS-P805HR-E
HWS-P1105HR-E
SENSOR ASSY, SERVICE
3
3
43F63325
HOLDER, SENSOR (TE)
1
1
703
43150319
SENSOR ASSY, SERVICE
2
2
704
43158190
REACTOR
2
2
705
43160565
TERMINAL BLOCK, 3P, 20A
1
1
706
43160581
TERMINAL
1
1
707
43160589
FUSE
1
1
708
43163055
HOLDER, SENSOR
1
1
709
43163059
SPACER, BUSH
1
1
710
43163060
SPACER, COLLAR
1
1
711
3026V074
PC BOARD ASSY, MCC-1571
1
1
181
182
Copyright © 2017 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.
Download PDF